JP7007171B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

In recent years, it has been considered that gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a setting change function in order to make the playability more diverse. In such a gaming machine, for example, setting information such as a hit probability can be set to any of a plurality of settings by a setting-related operation by the hall manager (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-91049

However, the conventional gaming machine having the setting information has a problem that it lacks countermeasures against fraudulent acts.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving deterrence against fraudulent acts .

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the present invention,
A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a symbol is drawn based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of the above and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
When the second notification is executed although it is determined by the abnormality determination means that there is an abnormality, the third notification is not immediately performed, and the third notification is performed after the completion of the second notification.
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
It is characterized by that.
Further, a game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and the lottery is performed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
If it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality during the second notification, the third notification is performed instead of the second notification.
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
It is characterized by that.
Further, a game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and the lottery is performed based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
At least the third notification is to perform notification using a plurality of notification members provided in the gaming machine.
If it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality during the second notification, the third notification is performed using the notification member not used in the second notification among the plurality of notification members. can be,
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the deterrence against fraudulent acts as compared with the conventional invention.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a cross-sectional view seen from above by cutting the door frame in the center in the vertical direction. It is a cross-sectional view seen from the right by cutting the door frame lower unit at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the ascending end, and (b) is a state in which the effect operating unit is moved from the state of (a) to the ascending end. It is a perspective view which shows. (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grill, the grill decorative frame, and the lattice decoration portion are removed in (a). (A) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the state where the grill decorative frame and the lattice decorative portion are removed in (a). It is a top view of the door frame lower unit which shows the state which the game ball is stored in the upper plate of a door frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the circumferential light area in a door frame. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect display device, and (b) is the decoration of the effect operation unit by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is an explanatory diagram which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display device, and the movable effect of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel and the like opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 17 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 17 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the right rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel and the like are made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board which makes the game panel opaque, and cuts the front unit in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game ball is distributed and the obstacle nail. FIG. 27 is an enlarged front view of a group of distribution passages in the upper right corner of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner in FIG. 27. (A) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory different from FIG. 28 and the like, and (b) is an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory further different from (a). It is an enlarged view of the main part which shows. (A) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory further different from FIG. 30, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a further different center accessory. It is a figure. FIG. 30 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory, which is further different from FIGS. 30 and 31. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view which shows the relationship between the light guide plate and a decorative substrate in the back first production unit. It is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back second production unit of the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back second production unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism in the back 2nd production unit. (A) to (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit. (E) to (g) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit continuing from FIG. 44. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED in the back 2nd production unit. It is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back third production unit of the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back third production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows the drive mechanism and the decorative substrate in the back third effect unit with the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which a plurality of rotating ornaments in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in a clockwise direction from a normal state. It is the front view which enlarged and shows the lower part of the game board with the special rotation decoration body in the back second production unit moved to a specific position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third production unit are moved to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the left side ring decoration body and the right side ring decoration body are moved to the appearance position in the back third production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the upper vertical ring decoration body, the lower vertical ring decoration body, the left horizontal ring decoration body, and the right horizontal ring decoration body are moved to the appearance position in the back third effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third production unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the production image in the production display device when a defect occurs in the third effect unit on the back side. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the shadow effect performed during the light emission effect in a back unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state that the game board faces from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 68. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control unit following FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening and closing processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd entrance opening / closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of a pachinko machine when the power of a pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine while changing the setting of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine during confirmation display of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during confirmation display of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of a command at the time of power-on of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a time chart which shows the transmission timing of the game information command at the time of turning on the power of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart showing the case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit.

As shown in FIG. 3, the outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically. The outer frame 2 is an outer frame that connects the left portion 10 and the right portion 20 of the outer frame, which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the left portion 10 and the right portion 20 of the outer frame. The upper portion 30, the outer frame lower portion 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20, the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper portion 30, and the outer frame. It includes a lower right side surface of the left side portion 10 of the frame and a lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame attached to the left end of the upper surface of the lower portion 40 of the outer frame.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame and the lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame make up the hinge portion 310 on the main body frame and the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The purpose is to support the lower hinge portion 320 coaxially and rotatably, and to attach the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

The door frame 3 has a game window 201 that visually closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven from the front side, and an upper plate 130 that stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. The lower plate 140 and the handle 111 operated by the player to drive the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a are provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The door frame 3 is attached so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed by the hinge portion 310 on the main body frame and the hinge portion 320 below the main body frame of the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The main body frame 4 has a game board mounting portion 301 that holds the game board 5 detachably from the front, a hinge portion 310 on the main body frame provided at the upper end on the left side when viewed from the front, and a main body provided at the lower end on the left side. A hinge portion 320 under the frame, a ball launching device 330 provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 and for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an upper plate 130 and a lower plate. It is provided with a payout device 350 for paying out the game ball B to 140, and a locking unit 360 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

In the main body frame 4, the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 are attached to the outer frame 2 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 so as to be openable and closable, and a door (not shown). The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable via the hinge portion above the frame and the hinge portion below the door frame.

The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame 4. Although not shown, the game board 5 is a general winning opening and a first starting opening that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. , A gate portion, a second starting port, a large winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 3 and the like. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20. The upper part 30 of the outer frame, the lower part 40 of the outer frame connecting the lower ends of the left part 10 and the right part 20 of the outer frame, and the hinge on the outer frame attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper part 30 of the outer frame. A portion 50 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left portion 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower portion 40 are provided.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge portion 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge portion 310 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 may rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[3. Door frame]
The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 to 9. FIG. 4 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 6 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 stores a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven so as to be visible from the front side, and a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a. It includes a plate 130 and a handle 111 operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a door frame lower unit 100 provided at a portion from the lower end to a height of about 1/4 of the total height, a door frame upper unit 200 provided above the door frame lower unit 100, and a main body. The frame 4 is provided with a door frame upper hinge portion 310 and a door frame lower hinge portion 320 that are rotatable and detachably supported by the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 (not shown). ..

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 has a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and a bulging portion 120. An upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the above plate for storing the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 provided below the upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B. The door frame effecting device 150 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion to present a predetermined effect to the player, and the game ball B in the upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 are used as the lower plate. The upper plate ball pulling button 124, the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and the door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126. It includes a display unit 185 and a lower front speaker 191 provided on the front surface of the bulging unit 120.

The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 having an inverted U-shaped inner circumference that makes the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 visible from the front, and a transparent closed glass that closes the game window 201. 205, a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201, a door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and a door frame. The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 220, and the upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are provided. ing.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a ball feeding unit (not shown) for sending the game balls B stored in the upper plate 130 one by one to the ball launching device 330 of the main body frame 4. The ball feeding unit includes a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 17) controlled by a launch control unit 372 of the payout control board 370.

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 4 to 12 and the like. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 11 (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the ascending end, and FIG. 11 (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the effect operating unit is moved from the state of (a) to the ascending end. It is a perspective view which shows the state. 12 (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 12 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the lower front speaker grill, the grill decorative frame, and the lattice decorative portion in (a). ..

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is arranged below by the game window 201 which closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided in the lower right corner in the front view, and is a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, and above and to the left of the handle unit 110. It is provided with a bulging portion 120 that bulges forward with respect to a surface that closes the front surface of the main body frame 4.

Further, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device arrangement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and has an upper plate 130 for storing the game ball B and a center in the left-right direction below the upper plate 130. A door frame effect device provided on the left side of the lower plate 140 for storing the game ball B and a device arrangement unit 123 on the upper surface of the bulge portion 120 and capable of presenting a predetermined effect to the player. It includes a door frame sub-display unit 185 provided in the upper right corner in front view, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided in front of the bulging portion 120.

[3-1a. Handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 rotatably supports the handle 111 that the player can grasp and rotate, the handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and the handle 111. It is equipped with a handle base 113 and. Further, the handle unit 110 is provided in the handle base 113, and the handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 17) that detects the rotation angle of the handle 111 and the player touching the handle 111. It includes a handle touch sensor 115 for detecting, a handle return spring (not shown) that urges the handle 111 in a counterclockwise direction, and a single-shot button 116 that can be pressed by a player.

The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves to the right as it moves forward. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 111 of the handle unit 110 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured such that the handle base 113 can be expanded and contracted in the direction in which the rotation axis of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired expansion and contraction position. As a result, the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, so that the handle 111 can be operated at a position that is easy for the player to operate.

The handle 111 is rotatably supported by the handle base 113 only within a predetermined angle range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions that are separated in the circumferential direction and protrude from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 is translucent and can be luminescently decorated in various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged at the rear.

The handle rotation detection sensor 114 of the handle unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 111. The driving force of the firing solenoid 331 in the ball launching device 330, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to the rotation operation of the handle 111, and the game ball has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like changes. Therefore, by detecting the electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 or the like with the handle touch sensor, whether or not the player is touching the handle 111 or not is determined. Detect. In the present embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is received, and the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. The drive of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled by, and the game ball B can be driven.

That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 in some way without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 111 in a manner different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

When the player presses the single-shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 while the player is rotating the handle 111, the launch control unit 372 of the payout control board 370 stops the drive of the launch solenoid 331. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 111. Then, by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 116, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before the single-shot button 116 is operated.

[3-1b. Swelling part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 has a front view shape formed in a T-shape having a short axis extending vertically, and a plan view shape in which the rear end side is in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape with the entire width and the width narrowing toward the front (see FIG. 9 and the like). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward slightly longer than half the total width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined so as to be located downward with respect to the horizontal plane toward the front.

In the left-right direction, the bulging portion 120 has a central portion that divides the entire width of the door frame 3 into three equal parts and bulges forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3, and the remaining portions (both left and right sides). The part) bulges forward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3. As a result, the shape of the bulging portion 120 when viewed from the front is T-shaped. The bulging portion 120 has a speaker mounting port 120a having a square opening at the lower part in the center of the front surface. The lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment port 120a.

Further, the bulging portion 120 has a sound emitting slit 120b and a heat radiating slit extending vertically on both the left and right sides of the vertically extending portion (the portion where the speaker mounting port 120a is opened) in the front view T-shape. 120c is provided. The sound emitting slit 120b is for emitting the sound from the lower front speaker 191, which will be described later, to the outside. Further, the heat dissipation slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevating drive motor 175b, the second elevating drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191 and the like in the door frame effecting device 150, which will be described later, to the outside.

The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 provided on the upper end edge on the front surface, a bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 provided on the lower end edge on the front surface, and a rear end at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A device arrangement unit 123 provided so as to project from the side to the front, an upper plate ball pulling button 124 provided on the upper surface and discharging the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140, and an upper plate ball. It includes a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided behind the pull-out button 124.

The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 are milky white having translucency and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 extends along the upper end edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and is provided so as to decorate the upper edge on the front side of the above-mentioned upper plate 130. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a inside (see FIG. 15). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a row in the extending direction of the decorative portion 121 on the bulging portion. These plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

In the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, the distance between the two rear ends separated in the left-right direction is in the upper portion of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210 of the door frame upper unit 200 described later, which is separated in the left-right direction. It coincides with the distance between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is formed so as to coincide with the upper inner decorative portion 212 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration with the upper inner decorative portion 212. There is. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 together with the upper inner decorative portion 212 constitutes a first peripheral light region LA1 that emits light and decorates the periphery of the game window 201.

Further, the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 decorates the upper side of the upper plate 130 with respect to the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is configured so that a part of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (inside the storage region 131), and the game is stored in the storage region 131. The sphere B can be illuminated with light to decorate it with light emission.

The bulging lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120. The bulging lower decorative portion 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a inside (see FIG. 15). The plurality of LEDs 122a are arranged in a row in the extending direction of the bulging portion lower decorative portion 122. These plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

The device arrangement unit 123 is formed so that the shape in a plan view is a combination of a rectangle long to the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid having the front side of the rectangle as the base. The width of the device arrangement unit 123 in the left-right direction on the rear end side is about ½ of the total width of the door frame 3. The device arranging portion 123 has an open upper portion on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and is formed in a container shape extending from above to the inside of the bulging portion 120.

The upper plate ball removal button 124 is provided in the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper plate 130. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 124 downward, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be discharged from the delivery port 136 to the lower plate 140. The upper plate ball removal button 124 releases the game ball B in the upper plate 130 to the lower plate 140 only while it is being pressed, and when the pressing is released, the upper plate ball removal button 124 moves upward and returns to the original state. Stop the release to the lower plate 140.

The upper plate ball removal button 124 has a square outer shape. The upper plate ball removal button 124 has a light emitting decorative portion 124a that emits light by an LED arranged below. The light emitting decoration portion 124a is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 124. By making the light emitting decoration unit 124a emit light, the upper plate ball removal button 124 can be made to emit light.

The ball lending button 125 is arranged behind the upper plate ball pulling button 124 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged to the right of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulge 120. The return button 126 is formed in an equilateral triangle in outer shape.

The ball lending button 125 raises a predetermined number of game balls B by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pressing the ball lending button 125. The game ball B is lent to the player by supplying it into the plate 130. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display unit 185.

[3-1c. Upper plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and has a storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored. The storage area 131 is connected to each other by the front area 131a (the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 14) on the front side of the device arrangement unit 123, and the side areas 131b on both the left and right sides of the device arrangement unit 123. It is composed of (a portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14).

The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end side toward the front front region 131a. The right side region 131b extends in the left-right direction from the front region 131a side on the front end side halfway toward the rear, and then extends in the front-rear direction so as to narrow toward the rear end side. It is extended. The upper plate 130 (storage area 131) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device arrangement portion 123.

The upper plate 130 has a bottom wall 132 forming a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 that opens forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, an outlet 136 that opens forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and an outlet 136. It is provided in the vicinity of the above and includes an alignment portion 137 for aligning the game balls B toward the delivery port 136.

The bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130 is inclined so as to be lowered from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136. The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 stand up substantially vertically. The surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are formed in a mirror shape. The upper plate 130 forms a storage area 131 by the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134. The depth of the upper plate 130 (height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest portion (near the supply port 135).

The supply port 135 is for supplying the game ball B paid out from the payout device 350 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131. The delivery port 136 is for sending the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launcher 330 or the lower plate 140. The alignment portion 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 is lowered toward the delivery port 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement portion 123 in which the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid are combined in a plan view. ing.

Further, the upper plate 130 includes a storage light emitting decoration unit 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138a capable of irradiating light toward the inside of the storage area 131. The plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and are above the bottom wall 132 to a height higher than half of the outer diameter of the game ball B and substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. It is provided. These LEDs 138a are full-color LEDs. By emitting light from the LED 138a of the storage light emitting decoration unit 138, the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 or in the storage area 131 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The upper plate 130 is provided with the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134, and the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 raises the front end side of the storage area 131 to increase the number. The game ball B can be stored. Further, in the upper plate 130, a part of the light from the LED 121a of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the light from the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 also causes the upper plate 130. The game ball B in the storage area 131 is light-emittingly decorated.

The upper plate 130 has a front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement unit 123 in which the door frame effect device 150 is arranged, and side areas 131b on both the left and right outer sides. The front area 131a provides the door frame effect device 150. Since the game ball B can be stored on the front side of the plate 130, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. Further, in the upper plate 130, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, in addition to the front region 131a, the game ball B stored in the side region 131b is also included. , It can be easily seen from the player side.

Therefore, since the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen, the player can be made aware of the stored amount of the game ball B. Therefore, as the game progresses, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen. Even if the storage amount is reduced by consuming, the player can be made to easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount, and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130, so that the player does not notice. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper plate 130 and prevent a sudden interruption of the game, prevent the player's disappointment due to the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the upper plate 130, the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player can easily see the line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame. By simply dropping it on the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a, and it is not necessary for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. , It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the upper plate 130, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a to the outside of the storage area 131. When the game ball B in the plate 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), which makes it easier for the player to recognize the consumption speed, consumption amount, etc. of the game ball B. It can be made easy to exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the upper plate 130 is provided with a storage light emitting decoration unit 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and the light from the storage light emitting decoration unit 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B, so that the storage is stored. The game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shined and decorated by the light from the light emitting decoration unit 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game ball B. , The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to exert the same action and effect as described above. can.

Further, in the upper plate 130, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, and the like are formed in a mirror shape, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 is the upper plate. Since it is transferred to the peripheral wall of 130, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball B is also stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, and it is made to appear that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. be able to.

Further, in the upper plate 130, since the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game ball B stored in the plate 130 can be smoothly sent to the ball launcher 330 or the lower plate 140 from the delivery port 136. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the jam of the game ball B, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the upper plate 130, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the right side area 131b is visible from the front, the game ball B can be seen from the delivery port 136, which cannot be seen with the conventional pachinko machines. The state of being sent can be seen, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same action and effect as described above can be achieved.

[3-1d. Lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and on the left side of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in the shape of a shallow plate that is open upward. There is a gap between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left side portion of the bulging portion 120) so that the player's hand can be inserted. The front surface of the lower plate 140 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in a plan view.

The lower plate 140 is formed in the lowest portion of the bottom wall, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 141 (see FIG. 8) that can be opened and closed and the lower plate ball extraction hole 141 are opened and closed in the lower plate 140. It has a lower plate ball removal button 142 for discharging the game ball B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 17) for detecting that the lower plate 140 is full of the game ball B. is doing.

The lower plate 140 is supplied with the game ball B in the upper plate 130 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 124. Further, the lower plate 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 350 in a state where the game balls B are full in the upper plate 130. When the lower plate 140 is filled with the game ball B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects the full tank of the lower plate 140, and when the full tank of the lower plate 140 is detected, the game ball B by the payout device 350 is detected. Withdrawal is temporarily suspended. After that, when the full tank in the lower plate 140 is cleared (the full tank detection sensor 143 is not detected), the suspension of payout is released.

The lower plate ball removal button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower plate 140, and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower plate ball removal button 142 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower plate ball removal button 142 is held in the pressed state. When the lower plate ball removal button 142 is further pressed backward in this state, the lower plate ball removal hole 141 is closed, and the lower plate ball removal button 142 moves forward to return to the original state.

The lower plate ball removal button 142 has a light emitting decorative portion 142a that emits light by an LED (not shown). The light emitting decoration portion 142a is arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower plate ball removal button 142. By making the light emitting decoration portion 142a emit light, the lower plate ball removal button 142 can be made to emit light. For example, at the time of a "big hit" game in which many game balls B are paid out, the player's attention can be directed to the lower plate 140 by illuminating the lower plate ball removal button 142 by the light emitting decoration unit 142a. , The lower plate ball removal button 142 can be operated to eject the game ball B in the lower plate 140 to the lower dollar box or the like, and the lower plate 140 becomes full and the payout of the game ball B is suspended. It can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of door frame production device]
The door frame effecting device 150 is arranged in the device arranging portion 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120. The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device arrangement unit 123 that is open upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is visibly provided from the front through the device cover 151, and the door frame effect display device 152. The lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152, the first movable portion 155 provided in front of the lower speaker unit 153 so that the upper surface can be raised and lowered above the device cover 151, and the first One movable part 155 is provided so as to be able to move up and down, and the player can press and operate the effect operation unit 160, the first elevating mechanism 170 for raising and lowering the first movable part 155, and the second elevating and lowering mechanism 170 for raising and lowering the effect operation unit 160. It is equipped with a mechanism 180.

[3-1e-1. Equipment cover]
The device cover 151 is formed in a shape in which the shape in a plan view is the same as that of the device arrangement portion 123, which is a combination of a long quadrangle on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the quadrangle as the base. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a having a large opening in an isosceles trapezoidal shape in an isosceles trapezoidal part, and an inclination in which the rear end side is bent upward near the center in the front-rear direction in a quadrangular part. It has a face portion 151b and a plurality of grill holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape in the vicinity of the front end of the quadrangular portion. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. The first movable portion 155 is inserted through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151.

The upper end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 coincides with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200. Further, the device cover 151 is inclined so that the front side of the inclined surface portion 151b is lowered toward the front. As a result, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can be rolled forward and discharged into the upper plate 130.

[3-1e-2. Door frame production display device]
In the door frame effect display device 152, the display screen for displaying the effect image is formed in a long quadrangle on the left and right, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the total width of the door frame 3. The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is located forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed to the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is located at a height near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, and the lower side is located at a height below the bottom surface of the front region 131a in the upper plate 130. Further, the upper side of the door frame effect display device 152 is located near the rear end of the door frame lower unit 100 (device cover 151), and the lower side is located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device having a screen ratio of 16: 9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a arranged apart from each other on the left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which a pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b attached to the lower speaker base 153b. It has a lower speaker decoration portion 153c that decorates the outer periphery and the space between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output high-pitched sound.

The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear side is located upward with respect to the front side, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear side of the front surface perpendicularly to the front surface. It is formed in the shape of a long container on the left and right that is open to the left and right. Further, the lower speaker base 153b is formed with circular mounting holes on the front surface separated from the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined so that the inclination angle from the horizontal is smaller than the inclination angle from the horizontal of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 10 and the like).

The lower speaker decorative portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and has a plurality of annular portions arranged on the outer circumference of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of portions arranged between the pair of lower speakers 153a. It is composed of an arc-shaped part. The lower speaker decoration portion 153c has translucency, and can be decorated by emitting light by emitting an LED mounted on the lower speaker decoration substrate (not shown).

The lower speaker unit 153 is mounted inside the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward from the mounting holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153a are directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The upper end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located at a height slightly lower than the vertical center of the door frame effect display device 152, and the lower end is located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. There is.

Further, the front end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located closer to the front (slightly rearward from the effect operation unit 160) from the rear end of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and the rear end is the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. It is located in the vicinity. The lower speaker unit 153 can be visually recognized through the transparent device cover 151. Further, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be satisfactorily radiated to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156.

Further, the lower speaker unit 153 emits and decorates the lower speaker decorative portion 153c with an LED of the lower speaker decorative substrate (not shown), so that the speaker grills of the lower speaker 153a and the lower speaker 153a (device cover 151 and the first movable portion main body) are used. The space between the speaker and the upper wall of the speaker can be lit up, and the luminescent decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can be shown to the player.

[3-1e-4. First moving part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a container-shaped and transparent first movable portion main body 156 whose rear and lower portions are open, a first movable portion base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, and a first movable portion base 157. It includes a first movable portion cover 158 attached to the upper surface of the movable portion main body 156, and a first movable portion decorative substrate 159 attached to the inside of the side surface of the first movable portion main body 156 (FIG. 10). And see FIG. 11). The first movable portion 155 is arranged in the opening portion 151a of the device cover 151. The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be able to move up and down, and is moved up and down by the first elevating mechanism 170.

The shape of the first movable portion main body 156 is similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, as if a long quadrangle on the left and right and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the quadrangle as the base are combined. It is formed in a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 has an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and a side wall extending downward from the side surface excluding the rear side of the upper wall, and the rear and lower sides are open. It is formed in the shape of a container. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is low, and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is high.

The first movable portion main body 156 has a plurality of grills penetrating in a hexagonal shape at a portion excluding the opening 156a penetrating in a long square shape to the left and right near the front end of the upper wall and the opening 156a of the upper wall. It has holes 156b and a plurality of through holes 156c which are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the side wall and penetrate in a rectangular shape. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in such a size that the LED 159a mounted on the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 faces outward.

The first movable portion base 157 is formed in the shape of a long flat plate on the left and right. The width of the first movable portion base 157 in the front-rear direction is formed to be shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 so that the front end is substantially the same as the front end of the opening 156a of the first movable portion main body 156 in the front-rear direction. The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 in a horizontal state. A pair of elevating sliders 172 of the first elevating mechanism 170 are attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157, and a second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable portion base 157.

The outer shape of the first movable portion cover 158 is the same as that of the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, and is formed to have the same size. The first movable portion cover 158 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening frame portion 158a corresponding to the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156, and a plurality of louver portions 158b extending to the left and right and separated in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable portion cover 158 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface thereof. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 projects downward from the lower end of the louver portion 158b, and is inserted into the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. The effect operation unit 160 is inserted into the frame of the opening frame portion 158a.

The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 extends in a certain width except for both ends in the left-right direction, and is formed in a triangular shape so that both ends in the left-right direction spread diagonally forward. .. A plurality of (here, five) louver portions 158b are provided at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the front-rear direction. As a result, the game ball B can be stored between the louver portions 158b. By the way, one game ball B is between the first louver parts 158b from the front, two game balls B are between the second louver parts 158b, and the third louver part 158b is between them. Three game balls B can be stored between them (see FIG. 14).

A plurality of LEDs 159a are mounted on the front surface of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159. The plurality of LEDs 159a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156c of the first movable portion main body 156. The first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is attached to the inside of the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156, so that a plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through hole 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 is a full-color LED.

When the LED 159a is made to emit light in a state where the first movable portion 155 is lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 has a rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and a side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. Through the space, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be luminescently decorated. Further, when the LED 159a is emitted from the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 in a state where the first movable portion 155 is raised, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the storage area 131 or the like. It is possible to irradiate the front (player side) with light.

[3-1e-5. Production operation unit]
The effect operation unit 160 is a so-called push button that is provided so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155 and can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 160 is supported by the second elevating mechanism 180 so as to be able to move up and down, and is moved up and down by the second elevating mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

The effect operation unit 160 is an operation in which a translucent pressing operation unit 161 in which the characters "PUSH" are formed on the upper surface and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface and are arranged below the pressing operation unit 161. The part decorative board 162, the operation part movable base 163 to which the pressing operation part 161 and the operation part decorative board 162 are mounted on the upper surface, and the operation part movable base 163 are supported so as to be able to move up and down, and the lower surface is the second raising and lowering mechanism 180. The operation unit base 164 attached to the first movable unit 155 via (second elevating base 181), the operation unit spring urging the operation unit movable base 163 upward, and the urging force of the operation unit spring. It is equipped with a pressing detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 17) that detects a pressing operation unit 161 that has moved downward against the above.

The pressing operation unit 161 is a long quadrangle on the left and right, and the characters "PUSH" are formed in a relief shape on the upper surface. The outer peripheral shape of the pressing operation portion 161 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158a in the first movable portion cover 158.

The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation unit decorative board 162 are full-color LEDs. The operation unit decorative substrate 162 has a first LED that irradiates light upward and a second LED that irradiates light outward along the upper surface of the operation unit decorative substrate 162 on the upper surface thereof. The operation unit decoration substrate 162 can make the pressing operation unit 161 (characters of "PUSH") emit light by emitting light from the first LED. Further, by emitting light from the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 can be light-emittingly decorated, and when the effect operation unit 160 is at the descending end, the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable unit cover 158 is opened. It can be decorated with light emission.

The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a long box shape on the left and right with the lower side open. The operation unit movable base 163 is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 161. A pressing operation unit 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation unit decorative substrate 162. The operation unit base 164 is inserted into the operation unit movable base 163 from below.

The operation unit base 164 has a box-shaped portion that is large enough to be inserted inside the operation unit movable base 163 and has a long left and right opening, and from the box-shaped portion to the same position as the outer periphery of the operation unit movable base 163. It is composed of a flange-shaped part protruding outward. The operation unit base 164 supports the operation unit movable base 163 so as to be able to move up and down within a predetermined range. A second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 164.

The upper end of the operation spring is in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation unit movable base 163, and the lower end is in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation unit base 164. The press detection sensor 165 is mounted inside the operation unit base 164, and by detecting a detection piece (not shown) of the operation unit movable base 163, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 is performed via the operation unit movable base 163. Detect.

[3-1e-6. First elevating mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 10, the first elevating mechanism 170 is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and is for raising and lowering the first movable portion 155. The first elevating mechanism 170 includes a pair of elevating rails 171 that are separately attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and extend vertically, and a pair of elevating rails 171 that are guided in the vertical direction. A rail 172, a connecting portion 173 connecting the pair of elevating sliders 172 to each other, and a rail rotatably attached to the elevating slider 172 at one end and rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120 at the other end. A pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 that rotates the pair of elevating arms 174, and a first elevating detection sensor 176 that detects the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable portion 155). It is equipped with.

The pair of elevating rails 171 are separated from each other to the left and right at intervals longer than the length of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) in the left-right direction. The pair of elevating rails 171 are mounted inside the bulge 120 so as to extend vertically. The upper end of each of the pair of elevating sliders 172 is attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155, and the lower ends of each are attached to the connecting portion 173.

The pair of elevating arms 174 are attached to the corresponding elevating slider 172 so that their front ends are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and slidably in the longitudinal direction of the elevating arm 174. .. Further, the pair of elevating arms 174 are rotatably attached to the rear end side around an axis extending in the left-right direction with respect to the bulging portion 120. The pair of elevating arms 174 each have a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction.

The first elevating drive mechanism 175 is provided for each of the pair of elevating arms 174. That is, a pair of first elevating drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first elevating mechanism 170 rotates the pair of elevating arms 174 in the direction in which the front end side of the pair of elevating arms 174 moves upward by the first elevating drive mechanism 175, whereby the tip of the pair of elevating arms 174 The first movable portion 155 (effect operation unit 160) can be moved up and down via a pair of raising and lowering sliders 172 attached to each of them.

The first elevating drive mechanism 175 will be described in detail. The first elevating drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and revolves around an extended axis in the left-right direction. It has a pin 175a and a first elevating drive motor 175b that revolves the first elevating pin 175a. More specifically, the first elevating drive mechanism 175 extends in the left-right direction to the flat plate-shaped drive base 175c which is attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and the drive base 175c. A spur gear-shaped elevating gear 175d and a spur gear-shaped elevating gear 175d, which are rotatably attached around the shaft and have a first elevating pin 175a attached at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft, mesh with the elevating gear 175d. It has a drive gear 175e attached to the rotating shaft of the elevating drive motor 175b.

In the present embodiment, two first elevating drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gear 175e attached to the rotating shaft of each of the first elevating drive motors 175b is attached to the elevating gear 175d. On the other hand, they are in mesh with each other. That is, one elevating gear 175d is rotated by two first elevating drive motors 175b.

In this first elevating drive mechanism 175, when the drive gears 175e attached to the respective rotation shafts of the two first elevating drive motors 175b are rotated in the same direction, the elevating gears in which the respective drive gears 175e are meshed are engaged. As the 175d rotates, the first elevating pin 175a revolves around the axis of the elevating gear 175d. When the first elevating pin 175a revolves, the first elevating pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the elevating arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, so that the elevating arm 174 is on the rear end side. Will rotate (rotate) around. As a result, the front end side of the elevating arm 174 moves in the vertical direction, so that the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down via the elevating slider 172 to which the front end side of the elevating arm 174 is attached.

The first elevating detection sensor 176 is in the detection state when the pair of elevating sliders 172 are located at the downward moving end (descending end). That is, the first elevating detection sensor 176 detects that the first movable portion 155 is located at the descending end via the elevating slider 172.

[3-1e-7. Second elevating mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable portion base 157 in the first movable portion 155, and also has a second elevating base 181 that supports the operation unit base 164 of the effect operation unit 160 so as to be able to move up and down. A second elevating drive motor 182 attached to the second elevating base 181 and a second elevating pin 183 attached to the rotating shaft of the second elevating drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft. , The elevating transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction into which the second elevating pin 183 is slidably inserted and the upper part of which is attached to the operation unit base 164, and the second elevating base 181 (effect operation unit 160). It is equipped with a second elevating detection sensor 180a for detecting the elevating of the vehicle.

The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 has the operation unit base 164 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (direction in which an inclined axis line extends forward so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward). ) Is supported so that it can be raised and lowered.

When the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182, the second elevating mechanism 180 slides the second elevating pin 183 in the slit 184a of the elevating transmission piece 184 and moves up and down the inner surface of the slit 184a. Pressing in the direction, the elevating transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction. Since the operation unit base 164 of the effect operation unit 160 is attached to the elevating transmission piece 184, the effect operation unit 160 can be moved up and down via the elevating transmission piece 184.

In the second elevating mechanism 180, when the elevating transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the descending end, the second elevating pin 183 is located near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction. There is. That is, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the bottom dead center. When raising the elevating transmission piece 184 from this state, the second elevating drive motor 182 revolves the second elevating pin 183 so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second elevating pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, and the second elevating pin 183 presses the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, so that the elevating transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

When the second elevating pin 183 revolves further and the line connecting the center of the second elevating pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second elevating pin 183 moves upward on the inner surface of the slit 184a. While pressing to, it slides backward in the slit 184a. Then, when the second elevating pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second elevating drive motor 182 is stopped, and the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is stopped. In this state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, and the elevating transmission piece 184 is located at the ascending end.

When a force for moving the elevating transmission piece 184 downward acts by pressing the effect operation unit 160 or the like while the elevating transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the ascending end. Since the second elevating pin 183 is located at the top dead center, no force in the front-rear direction acts on the second elevating pin 183. Therefore, since the second elevating pin 183 does not revolve, the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

Further, when the effect operation unit 160 is pressed while the elevating transmission piece 184 is positioned at the ascending end, the player who is located in front of the effect operation unit 160 operates the effect operation unit 160. On the other hand, in addition to the downward movement vector, the backward movement vector acts. On the other hand, in the ascending end state, the second elevating pin 183 is located at the rear end of the slit 184a, so that even if the backward movement vector acts on the second elevating pin 183 via the slit 184a, The second elevating pin 183 abuts on the rear end of the slit 184a, the revolution of the second elevating pin 183 is prevented, the elevating transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the position of the ascending end. Can be maintained.

The second elevating detection sensor 180a is in the detection state when the second elevating base 181 is located at the downward moving end (descending end). That is, the second elevating detection sensor 180a detects that the effect operation unit 160 is located at the descending end via the second elevating base 181.

[3-1f. Door frame sub-display section]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150, behind the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126. The door frame sub-display unit 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. The door frame sub display unit 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is located forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper plate ball pulling button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 project.

The door frame sub-display unit 185 covers the frame-shaped sub-display unit decorative frame 186 that emits and decorates the outer periphery of the three square 7-segment LEDs, the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decorative frame 186, and the door frame effect device 150. Includes a transparent sub-display portion cover 187 that is tilted at the same angle as the tilted surface portion 151b of the device cover 151.

[3-1 g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 10 and 12, the lower front speaker unit 190 has a lower front speaker 191 mounted behind the speaker mounting port 120a of the bulging portion 120 and a plurality of grill holes penetrating the speaker mounting port 120a. The lower front speaker grill 192 that closes the lower front speaker grill 192, the horizontal grid-like grill decorative frame 193 that is arranged in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 and attached to the front of the bulging portion 120, and each grid in the grill decorative frame 193. It is provided with a bar-shaped lattice decoration portion 194 arranged on the rear side of each portion, and a grid decoration LED 195 provided at both ends of each grid decoration portion 194 to emit light and decorate the grid decoration portion 194.

The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs a low-pitched sound. The lower front speaker grill 192 is mounted inside the bulge 120. The lower front speaker grill 192 is punching metal.

The grill decorative frame 193 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface thereof. A plurality of grill decorative frames 193 are arranged so as to connect a rectangular frame portion along the inner circumference of the speaker mounting port 120a of the bulging portion 120 and two sides extending above and below the frame portion and to be separated from each other at the top and bottom. It is composed of the grid part of. In the lattice portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 193, the portion (general portion) excluding both ends in the left-right direction extends with a certain width, and both ends in the left-right direction are slanted downward toward the ends. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape that extends with a certain width after spreading to.

The lattice decoration portion 194 has translucency and is formed in a long columnar shape on the left and right. Both ends of the lattice decoration portion 194 in the left-right direction are located behind the trapezoidal portion of the grid portion in the grill decoration frame 193, and the remaining portions are located below the general portion of the grid portion. As a result, the lattice decoration portion 194 can visually recognize the portion excluding both ends from the front. A plurality of lattice decoration portions 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192. The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full-color LED.

The lower front speaker unit 190 can output low-pitched sound (low frequency) among the sounds to be output by the lower front speaker unit 191. Since the lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, sound pressure is applied to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. Can be made to. Further, the lower front speaker unit 190 can make the grid decoration portion 194 emit light and decorate by appropriately causing the plurality of grid decoration LEDs 195 to emit light, and the inside of the grill decoration frame 193 (lower front speaker) via the grid decoration portion 194. The front side of the grill 192) can be luminescently decorated.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Subsequently, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 to 9 and 13. 13 (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and FIG. 13 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the state where the grill decorative frame and the lattice decorative portion are removed in (a). The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 that makes it possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper unit base 202 is provided in the door frame upper unit base 202 and the door frame upper unit base 202, which are formed in an inverted U shape in which the inner circumference serving as the game window 201 is formed in an inverted U shape with a square whose outer circumference is long vertically when viewed from the front. It is equipped with a transparent closed glass 205 that closes the inverted U-shaped inner circumference (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202.

Further, the door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 provided in a band shape along the inner circumference of the inverted U shape of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit. The door frame covering the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 provided on the front side of the base 202 and outside the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210, and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. It includes an upper outer edge decorative unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 9). The door frame upper unit base 202 has a flat plate shape and is formed in a gate shape that is open downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer periphery is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and is formed in an inverted U shape whose inner circumference is open downward. The size of the inner circumference of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed to be larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged behind.

[3-2b. Closed glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner circumference (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 9). .. The closed glass 205 is provided in the game area 5a so that the game ball B does not fall forward from the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is for closing the front side of the door. The closed glass 205 is a transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Decorative unit inside the upper part of the door frame]
The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 extends along the inner circumference of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a certain width and extends forward along the wall-shaped upper inner base 211 and the upper inner base 211. A semi-cylindrical upper inner decorative portion 212 that is extended and provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper portion that is provided behind the upper inner decorative portion 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a decorative substrate 213.

The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions in an inverted U shape extend vertically in the vertical direction, and a semicircular extending portion in the inverted U shape extends upward. It is curved so as to protrude forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be translucent. The distance in the left-right direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 coincides with the distance between the rear ends separated to the left and right of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 in the bulging portion 120 of the door frame lower unit 100.

The upper inner decorative portion 212 is milky white with translucency and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper inner decorative substrate 213 is attached to the upper inner base 211, and a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface are arranged in a row along the upper inner decorative portion 212. The plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative substrate 213 to emit light, the upper inner decorative portion 212 can be made to emit light.

The door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 coincides with the rear end of the bulge portion upper decoration portion 121 of the bulge portion 120 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The upper inner decoration portion 212 and the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 form one continuous decoration.

The upper inner decoration portion 212 of the upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door frame is surrounded by the first circumferential light region LA1 (enclosed by a dotted chain line in FIG. 15) that emits light and decorates the periphery of the game window 201 with the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121. Part). Further, since the upper inner decoration portion 212 is formed in a milky white color, the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a can be reduced and radiated to the outside, so that the game window surrounded by the upper inner decoration portion 212. It is possible to prevent the inside of 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and has a plurality of projecting bases 221 that project forward and are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. , The upper outer valley decorative portion 222 provided at the front end of the protruding base 221 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 arranged between the protruding bases 221 and the rear of the upper outer valley decorative portion 222, respectively. It is provided with an upper outer valley LED 224 and an upper outer valley LED 225 arranged behind the upper outer valley decoration portion 223.

The protruding base 221 is formed in an isosceles triangle shape in a side view. The protruding base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to the vicinity of the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202, and is formed so as to extend outward from the upper inner base 211. The front end of the protruding base 221 protrudes forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211.

The plurality of upper outer apex decorative portions 222 are formed in a columnar shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the cylinder of the upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed to be about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212. The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length of the protruding base 221 provided in the left-right direction. These upper outer top decorative portions 222 have translucency.

The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221 and the lower surface or the upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper side or the lower side of the portion. It is composed of a portion (slope portion) extending diagonally to the vicinity of the front end of the projecting base 221 along the above. The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a mirror-shaped plating layer on the surface (front surface). Further, in the upper outer valley decoration portion 223, a square opening is formed in a portion extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged at the rear faces forward. ing.

The upper outer top LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high-brightness full-color LED.

The door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can illuminate and decorate the upper outer top decorative portion 222 by appropriately emitting light from the upper outer top LED 224. Further, the door frame upper outer valley decoration unit 220 can make the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 emit light and decorate by appropriately causing the upper outer valley LED 225 to emit light, and the upper outer valley decoration portion 222 separated in the vertical direction. You can make the space between each other shine brightly.

The upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 emit light and decorate the outside of the first peripheral light region LA1 around the game window 201 (FIG. 15). The part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). Further, the front end of the upper outer top decoration unit 222 and the upper outer valley decoration unit 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is located behind the front end of the upper inner decoration unit 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light radiated from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer Even if the valley decoration portion 223 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to prevent the inside of the game window 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged along the outer peripheral edge (left and right sides and upper side) of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the outer periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is provided with a door frame upper cover 232 that is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an opaque decorative portion 233 provided on the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full-color LEDs.

The door frame upper cover 232 connects a pair of side walls extending forward from the portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the upper sides of the pair of side walls to each other, and is near the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of an upper wall extending forward from the site and a front wall connecting the front side of the pair of side walls and the front side of the upper wall, and is formed in a box shape with the rear and lower sides open. Has been done. The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparently formed.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the upper inner decorative portion 212 so that the front end of the side wall is located slightly forward of the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212. Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to a height near the upper end of the portion extending linearly in the inverted U shape in the game window 201, from which the door frame upper unit base 202 It curves and extends in an arc shape so that it is located forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. Further, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved in an arcuate shape upward, and are curved in a direction closer to each other as the upper cover 232 is moved upward.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed with a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a to which the grill decorative frame 243 and the like of the upper speaker unit 240 are mounted at both left and right corners of the upper part of the front wall.

The opaque decorative portion 233 is provided on the outer surface of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. The opaque decorative portion 233 has a slit 233a extending back and forth formed at a position at the same height as the protruding base 221 in the door frame upper outer decorative unit 220. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233a of the opaque decorative portion 233.

The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 so as to be visible from the front by the door frame upper cover 232. Further, the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 appropriately emits light of a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (the side wall and the upper wall, respectively). The front end of the door can be decorated with light emission.

Further, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has opaque decoration portions 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer top LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 is the pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent another player sitting in front of another pachinko machine arranged adjacent to the machine 1 from being irradiated.

The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 (front end outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 emit light and decorate the outside of the second peripheral light region LA2 around the game window 201 (third peripheral light region LA3 (). A portion surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 15) is configured. Further, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 are arranged on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light radiated from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are made to emit light, the inside of the game window 201 is emitted. It is possible to prevent the game area 5a from being difficult to see due to glare, and to visually recognize the game area 5a from the front through the game window 201 in a good state.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 closes the upper speaker 241 attached to each of the left and right corners in the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and the speaker attachment port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of each upper speaker 241. The upper speaker grill (not shown), the horizontal grid-shaped grill decorative frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same as each grid portion in the grill decorative frame 243. A bar-shaped grid decoration portion 244 arranged behind the upper speaker grill at intervals, and a grid decoration LED 245 provided at the outer end of each grid decoration portion 244 in the left-right direction to emit light and decorate the grid decoration portion (Fig.). 13).

The upper speakers 241 are attached obliquely at the center of the door frame upper unit 200 in the left-right direction so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached behind the adjacent upper outer top decoration portion 222 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220. The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs sound in the entire range from bass to treble. The upper speaker grill is attached to the inside (rear surface of the front wall) of the door frame upper cover 232. The upper speaker grill is punching metal.

The grill decorative frame 243 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface thereof. The grill decorative frame 243 is arranged so as to connect the frame portion having a shape along the inner circumference of the speaker mounting port 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and the two sides extending above and below the frame portion and to separate them from each other. It is composed of a plurality of grid parts. In the lattice portion extending to the left and right of the grill decorative frame 243, the portion (general portion) excluding the end portion on the outside in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 extends with a certain width, and the end portion on the outside in the left-right direction. Is formed in a trapezoidal shape that extends diagonally downward toward the end and then extends with a certain width.

The lattice decoration portion 244 has translucency and is formed in a long columnar shape on the left and right. The lattice decoration portion 244 can be visually recognized from the front through the upper speaker grill. The grid decoration LED 245 is a full-color LED.

The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. Further, the upper speaker unit 240 can make the lattice decoration portion 244 emit light and decorate by appropriately causing the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 to emit light, and the inside of the grill decoration frame 243 (of the upper speaker grill) via the lattice decoration portion 244. The rear side) can be decorated with light emission.

Further, in the upper speaker unit 240, the upper outer top decorative portion 222 arranged in the upper speaker grill (grill decoration frame 243) is located in front of the upper speaker 241 in the front view. That is, between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grill, a lattice decoration portion 244 capable of luminescent decoration and an upper outer top decoration portion 222 are arranged. As a result, when the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the lattice decoration portion 244 are light-emitting decorated, it is possible to show the player an effect that the inside of the speaker grill is light-emitting decorated, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. ..

[3-3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Subsequently, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 to 15. FIG. 14 is a plan view of a door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a peripheral light region in the door frame. With the front surface of the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 makes most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 visible from the front through the game window 201. be able to. Further, the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a) can be closed by the closing glass 205 of the game window 201.

In the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 15 and the like, the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 are connected in a ring shape, and the upper plate 130, the door frame effecting device 150, and the door frame effecting device 150 are connected in the ring. The game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effecting device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, the upper inner decorative portion 212, and (first peripheral light region LA1). Further, the outside of the upper inner decoration portion 212 is surrounded by the upper outer top decoration portion 222, the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 (second peripheral light region LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third peripheral light region LA3). There is. That is, the game window 201 is triple-enclosed by three peripheral light regions, that is, the first peripheral light region LA1, the second peripheral light region LA2, and the third peripheral light region LA3.

In the door frame 3, the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 is formed in the bulging portion 120. It circulates along the front edge and is sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside (lower plate 140 or ball launcher 330).

In the door frame 3, in a normal state, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation unit 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are located at the downward moving end (descending end), respectively. In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable portion main body 156 through the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156.

The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging upper decorative portion 121 over the entire length at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130. The upper end of the wall for storing the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is raised by the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121. The upper end of the front side (front region 131a side) of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame effecting device 150 (first movable portion 155) in the normal state. As a result, when the inside of the upper plate 130 is filled with the game ball B, the game ball B overflows to the door frame effect device 150 side, and the upper plate 130 is full with the game ball B for the player. Can be easily recognized, and the game ball B can be prevented from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.

In the door frame 3, the upper plate ball pulling button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are integrated in the right corner on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper plate 130. The surface on which the upper plate ball pulling button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121, and is provided forward. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward it. As a result, when the game ball B is placed on the surface provided with the upper plate ball removal button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126, the game ball B is formed by the surface and the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121. Can be rolled toward the upper plate 130 and discharged into the upper plate 130.

Further, in the door frame 3, the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 (that is, the inner surface of the upper plate 130) constituting the upper plate 130 are formed in a mirror shape. Since the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 moves to the inner surface of the upper plate 130, the photographed game ball B can be seen, which gives the illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. At the same time, the volume of the upper plate 130 can be made to appear large.

In the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 in the upper plate 130 first rolls forward in the left side region 131b, then enters the front region 131a and enters the front region 131a. Roll to the right inside. Then, the player enters the right side region 131b from the right end of the front region 131a, rolls backward in the right side region 131b, and then sends the game ball B to the outside from the delivery port 136. Can be shown to (see FIG. 14). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player on the front side of the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the inside of the upper plate 130. The amount of the game ball B stored in the game ball B can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the delivery port 136 is provided at the rear end of the side region 131b on the right side where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. can. As a result, it is possible to show the player how the game ball B is sent to the ball launcher 330 from the delivery port 136 (upper plate 130), which has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines.

The door frame 3 can visually recognize the pair of lower speakers 153a through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156, and also visually recognizes the door frame effect display device 152 behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. In the door frame 3, the upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 is close to the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100, that is, the lower end of the game window 201. As a result, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are in close proximity to each other. Can be displayed.

In the door frame effect display device 152 arranged behind the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 positions the lower side below the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160 and the upper side at the upper front end of the effect operation unit 160. It is positioned above the door frame, and the upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is higher than the effect operation unit 160. As a result, compared to the case where the entire door frame effect display device 152 is lower than the effect operation unit 160, even if the door frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160, the door frame effect display device is displayed from the player side. The 152 can be made easy to see. Further, since the depth of the door frame effect display device 152 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the amount of bulging forward of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed, so that the bulging portion 120 presses the player. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling, and it is possible to entertain the game in a comfortable state for the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the door frame 3 is a door diagonally arranged behind the effect operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (the range between the two alternate long and short dash lines in FIG. 10) is in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation unit 160 can be seen near the lower outer edge of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying the effect image that decorates the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation unit 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and the effect operation unit can be changed by changing the effect image. The decoration of the 160 can be changed in various ways, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 can be seen in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame 3, the effect operation unit does not need to display the image of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. Since it is possible to display an image such as an arrow or a hand toward the 160 to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 160, it is possible to immediately direct the player's line of sight to the effect operation unit 160. The operation timing of the effect operation unit 160 can be made difficult to be delayed, and the player can enjoy the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 160 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower front speaker grill 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grill of the upper speaker unit 240 cause the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 to move forward (player side) under normal conditions. ) Makes it difficult to see.

[3-4. Light emission effect of the door frame]
Next, the light emitting effect by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 has an upper plate 130, a door frame effecting device 150, a game window 201, etc., and is formed in a milky white columnar shape with a bulging upper decorative portion 121 and an upper inner decorative portion 212 (first peripheral light). It is surrounded by the area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative portion 212 are arranged in a row in the extending direction. As a result, by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 121a and 213a to emit light, the surroundings of the game window 201 and the like can be illuminated and decorated. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a are made to emit light in order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the game window 201.

Further, since the door frame 3 includes the upper outer top decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 (second peripheral light region LA2) arranged outside the upper inner decoration portion 212, the upper outer top LED 224 is provided. By illuminating the upper outer valley decoration portion 222 and the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 by the upper outer valley LED 225, the outside of the first peripheral light region LA1 can be luminescently decorated, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that makes the light emission decoration.

Since a plurality of upper outer top decorative portions 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect like a level meter by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction. .. For example, when a chance comes, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or can be shown to the player as a sound meter according to the output music.

Further, since the upper outer valley decoration portion 223 is formed in a mirror surface shape, the upper outer valley LED 225 emits light to make the space between the upper outer valley decoration portions 222 shine stronger than the upper inner decoration portion 212. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Since the door frame 3 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, the upper outer edge LEDs 231 can be made to emit light, which can be seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the outer edge (third peripheral light region LA3) of the door frame 3 that was not emitted emits light.

The door frame 3 has a triple peripheral light region of the first peripheral light region LA1, the second peripheral light region LA2, and the third peripheral light region LA3 on the outside of the game window 201, respectively. By appropriately emitting light in the peripheral light region of the above, various light emitting effects such as rotating around the game window 201, light emitting effect toward the game window 201 from the outside, light emitting effect toward the outside from the game window 201, and the like. It is possible to show the player a bright light effect.

Further, in the door frame 3, the grid decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grid decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are appropriately emitted to emit light, so that the grid portion (lattice decoration portion 194) of the grill decoration frame 193 and the grill can be emitted. The lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the decorative frame 243 can be light-emitting decorated, and the player can produce a light-emitting effect that makes the grill decorative frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grill decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. Can be shown to.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decorative portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decorative portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the plurality of upper outer top LEDs 224, and the grill decorative frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LED 225 ( By emitting the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill), between the pair of lower speakers 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker 241. The space between the upper speaker grill and the speaker grill can be decorated with light emission, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that cannot be seen with conventional pachinko machines.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a are caused to emit light to be stored in the upper plate 130 and the upper plate 130. The game ball B that has been played can be decorated with light emission. For example, since the plurality of LEDs 138a are made to emit light in a state where the gaming ball B is not stored in the upper plate 130, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the entire inside of the upper plate 130 is dazzling. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect that is decorated with light emission, and the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play is interested in the pachinko machine 1 because the upper plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 shines brightly. Can be strongly attracted.

Since the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided above half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom wall 132 of the upper plate 130, a plurality of the storage light emitting decoration portions 138 are stored in the upper plate 130. The LED 138a of the above is made to emit light, and the light is irradiated to the upper half side of the game ball B and reflected upward, so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shines brilliantly. Can be shown to others.

When the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 is light-emittingly decorated, a part of the light is also emitted into the upper plate 130, so that the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 also causes the inside of the upper plate 130 and the upper plate 130 to be decorated. It is possible to show the player the light emission effect that the stored game ball B emits and decorates.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a light emitting decorative portion 124a surrounding the upper plate ball removing button 124 and a light emitting decorative portion 142a surrounding the lower plate ball removing button 142, the upper portion 3 is provided. By causing the light emitting decoration portion 124a of the plate ball removing button 124 and the light emitting decorative portion 142a of the lower plate ball removing button 142 to emit light, the upper plate ball removing button 124 and the lower plate ball removing button 142 can be light-emitting decorated. Therefore, when a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as during a "big hit" game, the upper plate 130 and the lower plate 140 are decorated with light emission by the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142. It is possible to show a light emitting effect that urges the player to operate the upper plate ball removal button 124 and the lower plate ball removal button 142 so as to prevent the tank from becoming full.

As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can show the player various light emission effects, and by appropriately combining them, the player can present more various effects to the player. It is possible to entertain and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

[3-5. Door frame production device production]
Next, the effect of the door frame 3 by the door frame effect device 150 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 16 and the like. FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation unit in the door frame effect display device, and FIG. 16B is an effect operation unit based on the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a decoration, and (c) is an explanatory diagram which shows an example of the collaboration effect by the effect image of a door frame effect display device, and the movable effect of an effect operation unit.

In the door frame effect device 150, in a normal state, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation unit 160 are respectively located at the lower moving end (descending end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156) is located slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151. Further, in the effect operation unit 160, the pressing operation unit 161 is located slightly above the upper surface of the first movable portion main body 156 through the opening portion 156a of the first movable portion main body 156. Even in this normal state, the pressing operation unit 161 in the effect operation unit 160 can be pressed.

When the first LED of the operation unit decorative substrate 162 is made to emit light in a normal state, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 emits light. Further, when the second LED of the operation unit decorative substrate 162 is made to emit light in a normal state, the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 surrounding the outside of the pressing operation unit 161 emits light to decorate the game. Can be shown to others. With these light emission effects, the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation unit 161 and the player is urged to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. Can be made easier to participate in.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the first movable portion main body 156 pass through the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156. The space can be decorated with light emission. That is, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is light-emitting and decorated.

When a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a in this normal state, the sound is radiated to the player side through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. , The player can hear the sound effect that the sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161). As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the pressing operation unit 161 by the sound from the lower speaker 153a, and the player is urged to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 to operate the pressing operation unit 161. It is possible to make it easier to participate in the player participation type production.

Further, in the normal state, the door frame effect display device 150 can visually recognize the door frame effect display device 152 in good condition from the player side through the device cover 151, and is displayed on the door frame effect display device 152. The effect image can entertain the player (see FIG. 16A and the like).

In the normal state, the door frame effecting device 150 revolves the first elevating pin 175a by the four first elevating drive motors 175b of the first elevating mechanism 170, thereby passing through the pair of elevating arms 174 and the elevating slider 172. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the first movable unit 155 moves upward together with the effect operation unit 160 to the upward moving end (rising end). As a result, the first movable portion 155 pops out upward together with the effect operation unit 160, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be strongly urged to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161. At the same time, by raising the first movable portion 155, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

In the state where the first movable portion 155 is moved to the ascending end, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side as shown in FIG. 11A. In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light, the player can be shown the light emitting effect that the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 emits light and decorates. Therefore, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 is light-emittingly decorated, the effect that the first movable portion 155 rises from the light is played. It can be shown to the player and can have a strong impact on the player.

Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable portion decorative substrate 159 are made to emit light in a state where the first movable portion 155 is moved to the ascending end, a part of the light is stored in the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130. Since it is irradiated, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that makes the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 shine even by the plurality of LEDs 159a, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first elevating drive motors 175b, the first elevating drive motor 175b is repeatedly rotated forward and backward in small steps to vibrate the first movable portion 155. Can be made to. As a result, when the player touches the first movable portion 155 or the effect operation unit 160 while the first movable portion 155 is vibrating, the vibration can surprise the player. Further, by vibrating the first movable portion 155 at the timing of pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter, and the player can change it. Can be entertained.

Further, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end side, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed on the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 move upward, so that the plurality of grill holes 156b And the volume of the space between the pair of lower speakers 153a will increase. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grill hole 156b changes, so that the natural vibration of the portion changes and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. It is possible to let the player hear the acoustic effect of changing the tone of the sound radiated to the player side through the grill hole 156b of the above.

Further, when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the first movable portion 155 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper part of the first movable portion 155 becomes the door frame effect display device 152. It seems to cover the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable portion 155 is moved to the ascending end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable portion 155. The rise of the movable portion 155 can be noticed, and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

At this time, on the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image in which the first movable portion 155 is lifted by a predetermined character, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by raising the first movable portion 155, and the like. By displaying, the collaborative effect of the movable effect of the first movable portion 155 and the effect image can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly entertained.

Further, in the door frame effecting device 150, when the second elevating pin 183 is revolved by the second elevating drive motor 182 of the second elevating mechanism 180 in a normal state, the effect operation unit 160 is moved upward via the elevating transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end) of. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 of the effect operating unit 160 is in a state of protruding upward more than the upper surface of the first movable unit 155, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit 161. It is possible to strongly urge the player to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 161 and to raise the pressing operation unit 161 to make the player think that there is something good. This can increase the player's expectation for the game.

In the state where the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the ascending end, as shown in FIG. 11B, the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 on the lower side of the pressing operation unit 161 is exposed to the outside. In this state, when the second LED of the operation unit decorative substrate 162 is made to emit light, the player can be shown the light emission effect that the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 emits light and decorates. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved from the descending end to the ascending end while the peripheral wall of the operation unit movable base 163 of the effect operation unit 160 is light-emittingly decorated, the effect is such that the effect operation unit 160 rises from the light. Can be shown to the player and can give a strong impact to the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 160 can be raised and lowered by the second elevating drive motor 182, the effect operation unit 160 can be vibrated by repeating the forward and reverse rotation of the second elevating drive motor 182 in small steps. .. As a result, when the player touches the effect operation unit 160 while the effect operation unit 160 is vibrating, the vibration can surprise the player. Further, by vibrating the effect operation unit 160 at the timing of pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter, and the player can be affected. Can be entertained.

Further, when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the effect operation unit 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the upper part of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed on the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152. It seems to cover the bottom of the door. As a result, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the ascending end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, so that the effect operation unit 160 is directed to the player. It is possible to notice the increase in the amount of the door, and it is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

At this time, on the door frame effect display device 152, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 16B) that decorates the surroundings of the effect operation unit 160, and an effect that lifts the effect operation unit 160 by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image (see FIG. 16 (c)) in which a predetermined character is lifted by raising the effect operation unit 160, etc., a collaborative effect between the movable effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect image is displayed. Can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly entertained.

The effect operation unit 160 can be moved to the ascending end with the first movable portion 155 in the descending end state, and can also be raised with the first movable portion 155 in the ascending end state (FIG. 11B). State). For example, by moving the first movable portion 155 from the descending end to the ascending end and then moving the effect operating unit 160 from the descending end to the ascending end, the player can perform a movable effect in which the effect operating unit 160 rises in two stages. Can be shown to. As a result, the effect operation unit 160 rises in two stages, so that when the player operates the effect operation unit 160, the "big hit" game is started (the special lottery result is "big hit"). This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation for the game, and at the same time, the player can be made to operate the production operation unit 160 to enjoy the player participation type production.

As described above, the door frame effect device 150 can present various effects such as light emission effect, movable effect, image effect, player participation type effect, sound effect, etc. to the player as described above. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a more diverse effect to the player, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player.

[3-6. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is played. The front plate 130 having the storage area 131 of the game ball B surrounding the device arrangement unit 123 is provided by the front area 131a on the front side of the device arrangement unit 123 and the side areas 131b on both the left and right outer sides. The area 131a allows the game ball B to be stored in front of the door frame effecting device 150, so that the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen by the player. Further, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, in addition to the front region 131a, the game ball B stored in the side region 131b is also from the player side. It can be made easier to see.

Therefore, since the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen, the player can be made aware of the stored amount of the game ball B. Therefore, as the game progresses, the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be easily seen. Even if the storage amount is reduced by consuming, the player can be made to easily recognize the decrease in the storage amount, and the game ball B can be replenished in the upper plate 130, so that the player does not notice. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from disappearing from the upper plate 130 and prevent a sudden interruption of the game, prevent the player's disappointment due to the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. It can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player can direct the line of sight to the door frame below the game area 5a. By simply dropping it on the device 150, it is possible to immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130. , It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side areas 131b connected by the front area 131a and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front area 131a feeds from the supply port 135. This is to be provided on the way to the outlet 136, and the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out from the delivery port 136 to the outside of the storage area 131 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the eyes (front area 131a), and the consumption speed and amount of the game ball B are consumed for the player. Can be easily recognized, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be easily exerted.

Further, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the side regions 131b on both the left and right sides of the device arrangement unit 123 and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 in the left-right direction is provided. Since the storage area 131 can be increased in the left-right direction, the storage amount of the game ball B in the upper plate 130 can be increased. Therefore, since a large number of game balls B can be stored in the upper plate 130, the player can play the game without worrying about the stored amount of the game balls B, and the player can concentrate on the game. The game can be further enjoyed, and the player can immediately recognize whether or not the game ball B is present in the front area 131a simply by dropping the line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect device 150. It is possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the game without having to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper plate 130, which makes the game entertaining and reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, a storage light emitting decoration portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131 of the upper plate 130 is provided above half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper plate 130. Since the light from the LED 138a of the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is irradiated to the portion above the half of the game ball B stored in the 131, the light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138 is emitted by the game ball B. Can be reflected upwards. Therefore, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be shined and decorated by the light from the stored light emitting decoration unit 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game ball B. At the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130, and the amount of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effect as described above. Can play.

Further, since the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the rear peripheral wall 133 facing the front of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminescent decoration that cannot be seen in conventional pachinko machines, to surprise the player, and to direct the player's attention to the upper plate 130 (storage area 131). It is possible to have the player confirm the stored amount of the game ball B so that the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is formed in a mirror shape, the light from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 or the light reflected by the game ball B from the stored light emitting decoration portion 138 is emitted from the upper plate 130. By reflecting on the inner surface, it is possible to further increase the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the storage light emitting decoration unit 138, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the alignment portion 137 is provided in the vicinity of the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged in the vicinity of the delivery port 136, and the game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. The game ball B can be smoothly sent from the delivery port 136 to the ball launcher 330 or the lower plate 140. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the jam of the game ball B, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side area 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is delivered from the delivery port 136, which has not been seen by conventional pachinko machines. The situation can be seen, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same action and effect as described above can be achieved.

Further, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the device arrangement unit 123, the game ball B is provided on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device arrangement unit 123. Even if the door is placed and rolled forward, it will fall into the front area 131a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from falling forward from the bulging portion 120.

Further, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, the front peripheral wall 134, and the like of the upper plate 130 are formed in a mirror shape, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 is the upper plate 130. Because it moves to the peripheral wall of the wall, it is possible to make the player think that the game ball B is also stored on the other side of the peripheral wall, and to make it appear that many game balls B are stored in the upper plate 130. Can be done.

Further, since the storage light emitting decoration unit 138 that irradiates the storage area 131 with light is provided, the light from the storage light emitting decoration unit 138 or the light from the storage light emitting decoration unit 138 reflected by the game ball B is above. By reflecting on the inner surface of the dish 130, it is possible to further increase the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the storage light emitting decoration unit 138, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the door frame effecting device 150 is arranged in the device arranging portion 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the effect of the door frame effecting device 150, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game is suppressed. Can be made to.

In the above embodiment, as the storage area 131 in which the game ball B in the upper plate 130 is stored, the front area 131a in front of the device arrangement unit 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device arrangement unit 123. Although the one composed of the two side regions 131b of the above is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device arrangement unit 123 and one side area on the left side of the device arrangement unit 123. It may be composed of a back area behind the device arrangement unit 123. Alternatively, it is composed of a front area 131a in front of the device arrangement unit 123, two side areas 131b on the left and right sides of the device arrangement unit 123, and a back area behind the device arrangement unit 123 (the device arrangement unit 123 is). It may be provided in an island shape in the upper plate 130). The back area of the storage area 131 may be in the shape of a tunnel in which the game ball B cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150.

Further, in the above embodiment, the upper plate 130 is shown to have a mirror-like inner surface, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may be non-mirror-like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage light emitting decoration portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134. You can do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effecting device 150, a certain number of game balls B are placed on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper surface of the door frame effecting device 150 is set to be inclined so as to be lowered toward the upper plate 130, and the upper surface of the door frame producing device 150 is shown. The game ball B placed on the door frame effect device B may be rolled onto the upper plate 130 so that the game ball B is not stored (continues to be placed) on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150.

[4. Body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be mainly described with reference to FIG. The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and the game ball B is paid out to the player side (upper plate 130 of the door frame 3). , The game ball B used for the game is to be discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 300 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 300 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame base unit 300, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3. The main body frame lower hinge portion 320, which is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. I have.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 300, and is after the ball launching device 330 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the main body frame base unit 300. To the player side (upper plate 130 and lower plate 140) attached to the inverted L-shaped payout base unit 340 mounted along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the side and the rear side of the payout base unit 340. A payout device 350 for paying out the game ball B and a lock that is attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 and locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is equipped with a unit 360.

The main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 is recessed rearward from the upper end to the lower side within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. It has a mounting portion 301. The ball launcher 330 is mounted at a position below the game board mounting portion 301 on the front surface of the main body frame base unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 is a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port through which the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 is inserted. 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, in the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4, the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. It is attached. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b releases the pressing force and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 17 to 24. FIG. 17 is a front view of a gaming board in which a gaming panel or the like is made opaque in a pachinko machine. 18 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 17 from the front right, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 17 from the front left, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the game board from the back right. Yes, FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left rear. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 24 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel and the like are transparent.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 111 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. It is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 27 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 100 and 61, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is equipped with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 25 and the like) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a production drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a production drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. , The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the start which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. From the attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, and the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. Also above, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500, which is attached slightly upward in the center of the front view in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003, is provided.

The start port unit 2100 includes a first start port sensor 2101 that detects a game ball B received by the first start port 2002. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided therein, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It includes a start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism that acts illegally.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 61). See).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 installed in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. , The back third effect unit 3300 installed in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed on the front of the back second effect unit 3200. The game received in the back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. It is equipped with a back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges it downward.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparently formed. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in the front view, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the game panel 1100. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge by a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating the front and rear and a short elongated hole. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions, which are formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 25, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through port 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 that is cut out upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each projecting forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It comprises two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 23 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 is set as a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 61) that controls the game content and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 that can set the game performance, and a main control board 1310. It includes a main control board box 1320 that houses the modified board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning opening sensor. It is connected to 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a magnetic sensor 2470, a vibration sensor 3005, and an out opening sensor 3032.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 has a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting value. It is equipped with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, and the vertical distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1311 are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting in which a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder to be rotated by inserting a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, and a pressing operation unit is provided above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp on which the changeover button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and on the upper left side of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left side of the setting changeover button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310 g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit is arranged therein.

In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the setting key can be removed from the insertion slot. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted in the insertion slot, the other equipment is arranged in a row facing the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, and the setting key ON signal is the setting change board 1311. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are via openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. A "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings, respectively. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for each of these openings so that the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like. .. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is transparently molded as described above. Through the cover body, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted, and the setting switching button 1311b As a wiring pattern to which the signal of the above is transmitted, the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control board). The connection to the connector MSCN terminal of the 1310 is also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) in which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted is also formed on the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also kept away from each other (mutually). In addition to being formed (separated from each other), the wiring pattern with which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the setting value will be briefly described, and then the case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the setting key switch 1311a is operated by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key is turned on, and then the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

A person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After opening the setting key switch 1311a, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. Is set to ON. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f of FIG. 21, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is sent from the setting changing board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Is entered in. Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the value increases by 1 from the value of 1 and reaches the maximum value of the set value of 6, the value returns to the initial value of the set value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value sets the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Set to turn off Turn the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns to the rotation position of the key cylinder. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the set value from the state of displaying the set value on the setting display 1310 g. It switches to the state and switches from the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned on to the state where it is turned off.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting of the setting value. To complete.

When confirming the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then outside. Work to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then checks the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, this pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The OFF operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and currently sets the setting. Complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition is that of the pachinko machine 1 as described above. When the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, so that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. It is necessary not to. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by being manually operated and turned on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (instantaneously). The requirement is that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is restored when the power is restored after a momentary power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). Requires that "the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs)". It differs in that it does.

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and a normal probability from the time of change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, a jackpot symbol). The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition judgment table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the transition decision from the probability change time to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values are assigned to the various determination values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the setting value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. It is not possible to do this), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out port sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON, and the setting key can be turned ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). , This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF is serially output to the outside as serial information. A capable serial output circuit may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting key ON and OFF from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the setting key (1)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON, and the setting key can be turned ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). , This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF is output as a pulse signal to the outside. A pulse output circuit capable of the above may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. This makes it possible to improve security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided in the setting change board 1311, but may be provided in the main control board 1310 or in the payout control board 633 instead of the setting change board 1311. .. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 5 ms when the information conveys OFF. .. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting key ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "variation example (2) of the setting key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON, and the setting key can be turned ON. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON is set. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position) that turns off the key switch 1311a. , This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal were changed. An intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) is used between the boards extending from the board 1311 to the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit is provided on the main control board 1310 to provide a comparator circuit. By inputting the comparison result by the main control MPU 1310a to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a may determine ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (3) of the setting key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position), and this OFF signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board. Although it was supposed to be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is "a modification of the setting key (4)". May be described as).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is different. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and is provided with a plurality of parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. , The setting change board 1311 can be modified by intruding a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. The structure is such that the wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so as not to be possible. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, and when the cover body is configured to be open or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is relative to the base body. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or may be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "variation example of setting key (5)").

Further, from the above-mentioned modified examples (1) to (5) of the setting key, an embodiment selected and combined as appropriate may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery and the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of The probability (degree of advantage) is preset. In the present embodiment, a setting value 1, a setting value 2, a setting value 3, a setting value 4, a setting value 5, and a setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, a game specification such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which a probability (advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of setting values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, is advantageous to the player. There is a game specification in which the probability (degree of advantage) exists only in a single setting value in advance and the setting does not need to be changed at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not necessary at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since it is not necessary to use it at all, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 should be assigned as the following contents by design change by the software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of the object), lighting of the light emitter)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of the movable body (role)" is assigned and set as the setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (role) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for specifying "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, for each output port)") is assigned, and "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as the setting value 6. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a (described as the setting change completion command in FIG. 65) controls the peripheral by the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to operate the movable body (accessory) controlled by the substrate 1510 and to light the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after the RAM is cleared, the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time change setting mode in which the player waits after the end of the symbol change is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2)". ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of setting the change of the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the state of waiting for the player, it is possible to give a variation to the time from the end of the change of the symbol to the demonstration.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demo effect performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (role)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4. 4 is assigned, and the demo effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama style effect" is assigned as the setting value 5, and the demo effect setting that specifies "historical drama style effect, movable body (character)" as the setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "modification example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 for specifying "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 for specifying "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set to the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is turned down (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is turned up), and the movement to the minimum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the machine stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to the set value 6 is moved in the direction in which the volume adjustment switch is increased (moved in the direction opposite to the direction in which the volume is decreased), and the movement to the maximum volume side end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be the maximum volume or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of the error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, those that do not depend on it), and a pachinko machine that emits error notification sounds by setting the maximum volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk to notice, it may be jarring to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness can be increased or decreased from the default brightness for the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 3. A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". be). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and set the gradation point of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the lamp changes from the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is not turned off, but the brightness of the lamp is low and the lamp can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine) to the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification, and turns on, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to turn on, blink, and make a gradation point of the light emitting body. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) due to the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). The embodiment may be described as "modification example (8) due to common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification example (6) of the setting key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned ON to operate the setting key ON. When the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to be included in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a will be described later when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, while the game proceeds by clearing except for a specific area and then setting the interrupt permission or the like. The game proceeds by performing the set value confirmation display process in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and then setting the interrupt permission and the like. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process even once when the progress of the game is started. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of game balls that are output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output processing of the main control side power-on processing described later is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. At the same time, when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed. Therefore, the setting display 1310 g is used. It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 17 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results drawn by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 61) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29 and the like. FIG. 26A is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. 28 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group in the upper right corner in FIG. 27, and FIG. 29 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner in FIG. 27.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged above the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and substantially in the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is located below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first starting port 2002. The big winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 and at a height slightly lower than that of the first starting opening 2002.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001, and a start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the starting port unit which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. The attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500, which is attached slightly upward in the center of the front view in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003, is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 receives only one game ball B at the lower left of the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002, which are always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. It has one general winning opening 2001, which is always open upward with a possible width. The starting port unit 2100 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 24 and the like).

The start port unit 2100 has a panel of a first start port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 27 and the like) for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and a game ball B received in the first start port 2002. It is provided with a taxiway 2102 (see FIG. 26) that is guided to the rear of the plate 1110 and then discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is the center described later. It is located just below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the first start port 2002 is located directly below the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the central discharge portion of the stage 2503 is located. The game ball B released from the 2503a is configured to be received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times, and a first shelf portion 2201 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered at the upper left of the two general winning openings 2001. , A second shelf 2202, which is inclined so that the right end is lowered at the upper part of the two general winning openings 2001. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

The side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2001 at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100. The two general winning openings 2001 are provided facing each other so as to be arranged side by side. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side opens toward the right.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf portion 2201 is located near the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and the game ball B has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Can be guided to the right. The first shelf portion 2201 is inclined so that an extension line on the upper surface passes between the first starting port 2002 and the stage 2503. The second shelf portion 2202 is inclined so that the extension line on the upper surface passes through the open portion of the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100.

The side unit 2200 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 24 and the like). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. .. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 61).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 24 and the like). The attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 29 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape in the front view extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction to the upper end on the right side. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the upper right corner, and the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005 Can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is 5 times wider and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 has a large general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It is equipped with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 61 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to a special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 29 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422, and an attacker left passage, on which the game balls B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged in the upper right. The second start port guide shelf 2423, which is inclined so as to be lowered from directly below 2421 to the left and the second start port 2004 is opened in the middle, and the second below the second start port guide shelf 2423. The large winning opening guide shelf 2424, which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left from a position spaced from the left end of the starting opening guiding shelf 2423 to the left, and the large winning opening 2005 is open in the middle. I have.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a communication port 2425 communicating with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423 and a lower side than the large winning opening 2005 from the right end side of the second start port guide shelf 2423. From between the attacker lower right passage 2426 extending to the left end of the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 so as to be lowered to the left after extending to the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. It is equipped with an intermediate passage 2427 that extends downward from the grand prize opening 2005 and communicates with the attacker lower right passage 2426.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general winning opening 2001 to partition the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and also provides a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second starting port guide shelf 2423. It includes a partition portion 2428 to be formed, and an inclined portion 2429 that is inclined so as to be located to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428.

The second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004 that is open in the second starting port guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is formed, and the left end side is rotatably provided around an axis extending back and forth. The second starting port door 2411 is positioned so that the right end side is above the horizontal position and slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second starting port 2004, so that the game ball to the second starting port 2004 can be reached. The second starting port 2004 can be closed by disabling the acceptance of B. When the second starting port 2004 is closed, the second starting port door 2411 guides the game ball B circulating through the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left. be able to.

The second starting port door 2411 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the right end side moves upward with the left end side as the center from the state where the second starting port 2004 is closed. The second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened) by allowing the game ball B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When the second starting port door 2411 is raised so as to rise on the right end side to open the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2411 is raised from the second starting port guide shelf 2423. Therefore, the path of the game ball B rolling on the second start port guide shelf 2423 can be obstructed, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second start port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

The large prize opening door 2413, which is openable and closable in the large prize opening guide shelf 2424, extends back and forth and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The large winning opening 2005, which opens upward, can be opened and closed by moving forward and backward. The large winning opening door 2413 can close the large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and when the large winning opening 2005 is closed, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is distributed from the upstream side (right side). The game ball B that has been played can be guided to the left. Further, the large winning opening door 2413 is retracted by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500 have been distributed. The game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 has a first entrance 2007 that can be opened upward inside the large winning opening 2005, and is located upward on the right side of the first entrance 2007. A second inlet 2008, which is always open, is arranged. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first inlet sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first inlet 2007 and a second inlet sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second inlet 2008. 2405 and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 and circulating inside is distributed to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008). And the distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. , Is equipped. The distribution piece 2415 is formed in the inside of the large winning opening 2005 in a plate shape extending back and forth and extending left and right so that the right end is lowered, and opens upward by moving back and forth. The first entrance 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first entrance 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the grand prize opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upward at the second entrance. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the distribution piece 2415 opens the first reception port 2007 by retreating by driving the distribution solenoid 2416, and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is highly likely to be the first reception port 2007. Can be accepted by. The distribution piece 2415 closes the first inlet / outlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first inlet / outlet 2007 when the distribution solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let me. In other words, the distribution piece 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 so that it can be received in either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008.

In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is below the gate portion 2003 (from directly below) on the downstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. It is located slightly to the right), and the second starting port 2004 is located at the height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. 2005 is located below the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is located from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (distribution passage group 2520) may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. At the downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the attacker left passage 2421, the general winning opening 2001, and the attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500. B will enter any of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. , Is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B enters the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls on the second starting port guiding shelf 2423 and falls on the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423. It circulates to the second starting port 2004 side (left side) according to the inclination. When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, it circulates to the left on the second starting port door 2411 and is discharged from the left end of the second starting port guide shelf 2423 to the left. .. If the second starting port 2004 is opened when the game ball B passes through the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability.

The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402. If the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged to the left large winning opening 2005 side via the second starting port guide shelf 2423.

Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released to the left from the second starting port guide shelf 2423 is on the large winning opening 2005 side. Alternatively, it will flow down to either side of the intermediate passage 2427. If the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 when flowing down to the big winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the big winning opening door 2413 and from the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. It is released to the left. When the big winning opening door 2413 that closes the big winning opening 2005 is retracted and the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 to the big winning opening 2005 side is It will be accepted in the big prize opening 2005. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403.

The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting port guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008. Is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and is on the right side of the general winning opening 2001. When entering the attacker right passage 2422, it abuts on the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and bounces to the left. In the present embodiment, since the second start port guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second start port guide shelf 2423 coincides with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the attacker enters the right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off at the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 will drop (distribute) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

When the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 and abuts on the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces above the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429. Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located to the right with respect to the lower end, the game ball B in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected downward to the lower right passage 2426 side of the attacker. You will enter the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker. Further, when the game ball B in contact with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 bounces below the communication port 2425, it enters the attacker lower right passage 2426.

The game ball B that has entered the lower right passage 2426 of the attacker is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without having a chance to be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a sub-function display unit 2450 above the second starting port 2004. The sub-function display unit 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is determined by LED lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like. The normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B for 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed. It is something to do.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 61). The magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2503, the portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2503a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side emission portion 2503b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2503a) in the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction and at a position to the right of the outer peripheral surface on the right side. The gate portion 2003 is vertically penetrated with a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 that detects the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with a space between the gate portion 2003 and the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 so that only one game ball B can pass through.

Further, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and has an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to be lower from a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. The distribution passage group 2520, which is provided in the upper right corner and is composed of a plurality of passages through which the game ball B can be distributed, is provided. The distribution passage group 2520 extends vertically from the vicinity of the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to the upper side of the gate portion 2003.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. It is composed of the second distribution passage 2522 and the second distribution passage. The first distribution passage 2521 extends downward from the entrance side of the upper end along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (right rail 1005) in an arc shape, the lower end portion bends to the left in a crank shape, and the exit is downward. It opens toward. The exit at the lower end of the first distribution passage 2521 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003.

In the second distribution passage 2522, the entrance at the upper end is opened with an interval to the left with respect to the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521, and the first distribution passage 2522 is bent to the right in a crank shape near the upper end. It extends downward in an arc shape adjacent to the distribution passage 2521, bends in a crank shape to the left near the lower end, and then bends in a crank shape to the right, and the outlet is adjacent to the exit of the first distribution passage 2521 and downward. It opens toward. As a result, the second distribution passage 2522 can reduce the distribution speed of the game ball B more than the first distribution passage 2521. The first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of ridges 2523 at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, respectively, and the game ball B abuts on the ridge 2523. Therefore, the distribution speed can be suppressed.

This center accessory 2500 is on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game region 5a) of the front component 1000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. , An upstream space portion 2511 through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed. Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the entrance of the upper end of the first distribution passage 2521 of the distribution passage group 2520 is located directly under the abutment portion 1006, and the first distribution passage 2521 is the right rail 1005 (game). It extends along the periphery of the region 5a). Further, a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (periphery of the game area 5a).

[5-8e. Flow of game balls by distribution passages of center characters]
Next, the flow of the game ball B by the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29 and the like. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate portion 2003, and between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. Has been planted. In the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the game ball B circulating through the first distribution passage 2521 is on the right side of the gate portion 2003 (gate portion 2003 and right rail 1005). Is adjusted to be distributed with a high probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are such that the game ball B circulating through the second distribution passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. It has been adjusted. Further, in the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003, the game ball B circulating through the second distribution passage 2522 has the highest probability of being the gate portion next to the gate portion 2003. It is adjusted to circulate on the left side of 2003.

On the other hand, in the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the right side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of the attacker unit 2400. It is adjusted to enter the attacker right passage 2422. Further, as for the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the left side of the gate portion 2003 or the gate portion 2003 has a high probability. It is adjusted to enter the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 with the next highest probability after the attacker left passage 2421.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with the strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B circulates in either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first distribution passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first distribution passage 2521 has a high probability of being on the right side of the gate portion 2003 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the downstream end of the first distribution passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. Pass through. Then, the game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2422 with a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 will circulate in either the second starting port guide shelf 2423 or the attacker right lower passage 2426.

As described above, since the game ball B circulating through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, the lottery of the normal lottery result carried out by passing through the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B is not often performed. It is unlikely that a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 will be open will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 passes through the second start port guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second start port 2004 is often closed and the second start. Since the opening 2004 is not so much accepted, there are few chances that the second special lottery result lottery and the payout of the game ball B will be given by the gaming ball B being accepted in the second starting opening 2004. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates in the first distribution passage 2521, the privilege given to the player is relatively small.

Although the case of hitting right is described above, the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 that is open near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is also used. It will enter the first distribution passage 2521, and the result will be the same as above.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second distribution passage 2522 and circulates through the second distribution passage 2522, it is between the downstream end of the second distribution passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003. The plurality of obstacle nails N that have been planted pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability, and the lottery of the normal lottery result is performed. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of entering the attacker left passage 2421 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and from the attacker left passage 2421. The second start port guide shelf 2423 is distributed.

At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is drawn, if the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 has a predetermined pattern. Since the game ball B is opened at, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates in the second distribution passage 2522, the privilege given to the player is relatively high (many).

For this reason, the player is more likely to be given the privilege in the second distribution passage 2522, so that the player has the strength to drive the game ball B into the upstream space portion 2511 and the game. With the driving strength at which the ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522, the driving strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, and the driving strength of the game ball B is adjusted. It is possible to give a change to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

If the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is a "big hit" or the like that causes an advantageous gaming state. The large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and when the game ball B is accepted in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of the game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous gaming state (“big hit gaming state”), if the player is required to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B, some players may feel impatient or frustrated, and the game may be played. There is a risk of diminishing the interest in. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and the first distribution passage 2521 is circulated, the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422 are circulated, and then the game ball B is communicated with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. The game ball B can be distributed to the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 side (large winning opening 2005 side) by bouncing toward the opening 2425 and falling to the second starting opening guiding shelf 2423 through the communication opening 2425. Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005 with an easy driving operation without finely adjusting the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

[5-8f. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Subsequently, the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of the embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory different from FIG. 28 and the like, and FIG. 30 (b) is a distribution passage group of a center accessory different from (a). It is an enlarged view of the main part which shows the embodiment. FIG. 31 (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory further different from FIG. 30, and FIG. 31 (b) is a key showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a further different center accessory. It is a part enlarged view. FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a distribution passage group of a center accessory, which is further different from FIGS. 30 and 31. In addition, in FIGS. 30 and 31, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 30 (a), as compared with FIG. 28, the entrance of the upper end of the second distribution passage 2522 flows at a distance to the left with respect to the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. It was done. The same effect as described above can be obtained by the distribution passage group 2520.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 30B, the angle of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is such that the abutting portion 1006 can easily bounce off the abutting game ball B toward the entrance side of the second distribution passage 2522. The portion between the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 and the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second distribution passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It was made to. As a result, the game ball B easily enters the second distribution passage 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522 becomes wider. (Ii) It is possible to facilitate the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the distribution passage 2522.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 28 and 30, the entrances of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream side of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are arranged vertically and directed to the left. It is designed to be opened.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first distribution passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is one of the second distribution passages 2522. It constitutes a part. Further, in this embodiment, the left-right length of the upstream space portion 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is first distributed from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It is the length to the entrance of each of the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space portion 2511 shown in FIGS. 28 and 30.

In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, is it the driving strength that abuts on a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510? Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 that opens to the left, as compared with the embodiment of FIGS. 28 and 30 The adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B is narrowed. Further, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 and the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 separates the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space portion 2511 depending on the momentum and angle of the bouncing game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it does not deviate to the left from the upstream space portion 2511 and enter either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B becomes high, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can drive the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (b), in the embodiment of FIG. 31 (a), a branch portion 2524 that communicates with the second distribution passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first distribution passage 2521. Is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above the portion of the second distribution passage 2522 that is bent downward from the right end of the portion extending to the left and right (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is driven with the strength of entering the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is second at the branch portion 2524 (when the driving strength is weak) depending on the driving strength. Since the branch is made to the distribution passage 2522 side, the difficulty level of distribution of the game ball B to the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than that of the embodiment of FIG. 31 (a).

In addition, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second distribution passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first distribution passage 2521, and the first distribution passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second distribution passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second distribution passage 2522 is located at the portion that is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (branch portion 2524 side) and does not enter the first distribution passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first distribution passage 2521 to the second distribution passage 2522 in one way.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first distribution passage 2521 is circulated by entering the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle, the first distribution passage 2521 side is formed at the portion of the branch portion 2524. Or, since the branch is made to either side of the second distribution passage 2522, the player can be thrilled depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branch portion 2524, and the first distribution can be performed. It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B enters the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521 even though the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second distribution passage 2522. , At the branch portion 2524 of the first distribution passage 2521, there is a possibility of branching to the second distribution passage 2522 side. It is possible to excite and entertain the player, and when the branch portion 2524 branches to the second distribution passage 2522 side, the mistake of the player's driving operation is covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 is formed. Since the game ball B will be distributed, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she has gained, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 32, the second distribution passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 circulate in the first distribution passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side. Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous, it becomes possible to make the player think that there is something good after the game ball B distributes the bypass portion 2525. It is possible to have a person perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and entertain the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36 and the like. FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 61). See).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 installed in the back box 3010 behind the back first effect unit 3100. , The back third effect unit 3300 installed in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 installed on the front of the back second effect unit 3200. The game received in the back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and discharges it downward, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400. It is equipped with a back right ball discharge unit 3040 that receives the ball B and discharges it downward.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 35 and 36, etc.).

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion port 3011 notched so as to be recessed from the front end to the rear near the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate with the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the back first effect unit 3100, which will be described later, and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the insertion port 3011 inserts a padding between the rotating decorative bodies 3210 from the side surface side of the back box 3010, and the back second effect unit 3200 is vibrated by vibration due to transportation or the like. The rotating decoration 3210 can be prevented from moving. Alternatively, when a problem occurs in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, a finger, a tool, or the like can be inserted through the insertion port 3011 to solve the problem.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the back first effect unit. The back first effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened to the front.

The back first effect unit 3100 has a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and irradiate light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. The back first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which the LED 3121 is mounted, and the back first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3110 and irradiating light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffuser lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130, the plurality of LEDs 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130, and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110, and diffuses the light from the LED 3131 to irradiate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. And have.

Further, the back first effect unit 3100 sandwiches the transparent flat plate-shaped upper base 3151 attached to the front upper edge of the light guide plate 3110 and the light guide plate 3110 attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151, and also back. The transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, the transparent flat plate-shaped left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and the rear side of the left base 3153. The transparent left rear cover 3154 on which the light guide plate 3110 is sandwiched and the back first left decorative substrate 3130 and the diffuser lens 3140 are attached, and the transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110. It is provided with a shaped right base 3155 and a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110.

Further, the back first effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decorative body 3161 in which the relief-like decoration is formed and the left base 3153. , The back first left decorative body 3162 on which the relief-shaped decoration is formed, and the back first right decorative body 3163 which is attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and has the relief-shaped decoration formed. It is attached to the center of the lower front edge of the light plate 3110 in the left-right direction, and is attached to the rear side of the back first lower decorative body 3164 in which a relief-like decoration is formed and the back first lower decorative body 3164, and is attached to the front. It includes a back first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light toward the back first are mounted.

The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a notch 3111 notched upward in a semicircular shape at the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. Although not shown, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light by light emitted from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light by light emitted from the left surface. The first pattern and the second pattern are different patterns from each other. Further, although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the light emitting mode differs depending on the emitted LED 3121 among the plurality of LEDs 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120.

In the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the back first left decorative substrate 3130, the LEDs 3121 and LED 3131 mounted respectively are full-color LEDs. Further, the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three in the vertical direction. Since the back first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three, the diffuser lens 3140 is also divided into three in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the three. By making the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 emit light, the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be made to emit light, and by making the LED 3131 of the back first left decorative substrate 3130 emit light, the second of the light guide plate 3110. The pattern can be made to emit light.

The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 have a plating layer having a metallic luster. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are formed in a strip shape along the upper side, the left side, and the right side of the light guide plate 3110. There is.

The back first lower decorative body 3164 has a pair of portions extending in an arc shape in the vertical direction concentrically with the arc of the notch 3111 in the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and the upper and lower portions are opened. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. In the back first lower decorative body 3164, a plurality of three-way decorations are arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 has protrusions extending radially so as to pass through each of the three-way decorative parts. These radial protrusions extend outwardly from the three-way decoration and short toward the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is a transparent member provided with a thin-film vapor deposition layer having a metallic luster of a predetermined color and having translucency. In the state where the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 is not emitted from the back first lower decorative body 3164, the decoration on the front side can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition by the metallic luster vapor deposition layer. ..

In the back first lower decorative substrate 3170, the LED 3171 is mounted at a position behind the three-way decoration portion in the back first lower decorative body 3164. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are made to emit light, the entire back first lower decorative body 3164 can be luminescently decorated, and the three-way decorative portion can be lit and decorated more brightly. The plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

In the state where the back first production unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 and substantially in front of the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and has the first pattern. And the second pattern can be displayed by light emission. Further, as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, and the back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, and the back first right decorative body 3163 are shown. However, they are located near the upper edge, the left edge, and the right edge in the game area 5a, respectively.

Further, the back first lower decorative body 3164 is located directly above the out opening 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. .. The back first lower decorative body 3164 can decorate the outside of the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the lowermost specific position among the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotating decorative body 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 43 is a front view showing the drive mechanism in the back second effect unit. 44 (a) to (d) are explanatory views showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit, and FIGS. 45 (e) to 45 (g) show the back second effect unit continuing from FIG. 44. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a plurality of rotating ornaments. FIG. 46 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the back second effect unit.

The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300. The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of disk-shaped (here, 12) rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 have translucency. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229, which will be described later.

The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are composed of a plurality of (here, four) special rotating decorations 3211 and the remaining (here, eight) ordinary rotating decorations 3212. The special rotating decorations 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a fixed number (here, two) of the normal rotating decorations 3212 in between. In the present embodiment, the special rotating decorative body 3211 is decorated with a three-way decoration. The special rotating ornament 3211 is formed in a red color in the tomoe portion and a golden color having a metallic luster in the other portions, and has translucency as a whole. The ordinary rotating ornament 3212 is decorated with petals. In the ordinary rotating ornament 3212, the petal portion is formed in pink with metallic luster, and the other edging portion is formed in white, and the whole is translucent.

The back second effect unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a square outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center, and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a diameter larger than that of the through hole 3220a, and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the front surface of the 3220, and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference, which is larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210 can rotate. It is provided with an annular drive ring 3221 having a plurality of shaft holes 3221a inserted into the shaft hole 3221a and an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of shaft holes 3221a.

Further, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and the back second drive motor 3222 and the back second drive motor 3222 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3223 attached to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3222 meshes with the drive gear 3223 and also meshes with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221, and can rotate to the unit base 3220. A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3224 attached to the above, and a rotary body gear 3225 that is fixed to the rear end of each of the shaft portions 3210a of the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220. , Is equipped.

Further, the back second effect unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and is attached to the unit base 3220, and has a through hole 3226a having a rectangular outer shape and a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. A circular shape having an outer base 3226 and a circular shape provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and attached to the unit base 3220, the outer diameter of which is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. The inner base 3227 having a polygonal through hole 3227a in the center and the outer base 3226 are attached to the front surface of the outer base 3226. It is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second outer decorative body 3228 having a small diameter through hole 3228a, and the outer shape is the inner base 3227. The unit base 3220 is inserted into the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 which is circular and has a polygonal through hole 3229a in the center, which is larger than the outer diameter of the back second inner decorative body 3229. It is provided with an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, which is attached to.

Further, the back second effect unit 3200 has a rotation position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3210 that revolves while rotating is located at the lowermost specific position, and a special rotation position detection sensor 3231 that revolves while rotating. It is provided with a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotation decoration body 3211 is located at the lowermost specific position.

Further, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 and the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229. It is provided with a back second decorative board 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240, the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be light-emitting decorated.

The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. In the drive ring 3221, a plurality of shaft holes 3221a are formed in the same number as the plurality of rotary decoration bodies 3210. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The number of the trapezoidal protruding portions is the same as that of the rotating decorative body 3210 (12 in this case). In the present embodiment, twelve trapezoidal protruding portions are provided at an angle of 30 degrees in the clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding from the inner circumference of the portion corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a toward the center. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further toward the center from the detection pieces 3221c arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of detection pieces 3221c in between the plurality of detection pieces 3221c. It has a plurality of (here, four) special detection pieces 3221d. That is, the drive ring 3221 of the present embodiment has the same number (12 pieces) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotary decoration body 3210, and also has the same number (4 pieces) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotation decoration body 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220.

The outer shape of the outer base 3226 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the unit base 3220. The outer base 3226 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts with a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a as boundaries, and each is attached to the unit base 3220.

In the inner base 3227, the inner peripheral shape of the polygonal through hole 3227a is the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220, and is formed to have the same size. The inner base 3227 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts, each of which is divided into four by a crosshair obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center by about 20 degrees in a clockwise direction, and each of them is attached to the unit base 3220. There is. In the present embodiment, since the divided portion of the inner base 3227 divided into four is different from the divided portion of the outer base 3226, the unit base 3220 is compared with the case where each divided portion is the same. It is possible to improve the strength and rigidity when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to the surface.

The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the outer base 3226 and the same size. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed so that the inner diameter of the through hole 3228a is slightly larger than the same circumference in which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged in a row. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a red annular decorative portion 3228b provided in an annular shape with a certain width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners on the outer side of the annular decorative portion 3228b. It has a corner decoration portion 3228c provided in the. The annular decoration portion 3228b is decorated with stylized plant leaves arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decoration portion 3228c is decorated to imitate Karahafu. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface thereof. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a vapor-filmed layer having a metallic luster and a translucent property. The back second outer decorative body 3228 is divided into four parts like the outer base 3226.

The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter slightly smaller than the same circumference in which a plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged in a row. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227 and has the same size. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is a red decoration in which the leaves of the stylized plants are arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction so as to be paired with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. Is given. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on the surface thereof. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a vapor-filmed layer having a metallic luster and a translucent property. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227.

The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is formed in the front-rear direction so as to have a length connecting the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 includes a thin-film deposition layer having a metallic luster and a translucent property.

The rotation position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3240. The rotation position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c located at the lowermost position among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 43).

The special rotation position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227, and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221. More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has moved one in the clockwise direction from the lowermost portion of the plurality of trapezoidal protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 (rotation by 30 degrees). It is attached to a trapezoidal part that protrudes at the position (see FIG. 43).

In the back second decorative board 3240, a plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back second decorative substrate 3240 has a quadrangular outer shape, and a polygonal through hole 3240a is formed in the center. Further, the back second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. In the back second decorative substrate 3240, a portion outside the insertion hole 3240b is attached to the outer base 3226, and a portion inside the insertion hole 3240b is attached to the inner base 3227. The back second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight parts so as to correspond to the divided bodies of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, which are each divided into four parts.

Subsequently, the movements of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second effect unit 3200, the shaft portion 3210a projecting rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has the inner circumference of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 from the front. Rotatably into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 through the insertion hole 3240b of the back second decorative substrate 3240 and between the inner circumference of the outer base 3226 and the outer circumference of the inner base 3227. At the same time as being inserted, the rear end penetrates the shaft hole 3221a and protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221. A rotating body gear 3225 meshing with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210.

Of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 move one in the counterclockwise direction from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 in the front view. The shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decorative body 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. In the remaining eight ordinary rotating decoration bodies 3212, the shaft portions 3210a are inserted into the remaining shaft holes into which the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotating decoration body 3211 is not inserted.

In the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 43, in a normal state, four special rotating decorations 3211 out of twelve rotating decorations 3210 are in a revolution orbit. It is located at both ends in the vertical direction and both ends in the horizontal direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotating ornaments 3211 are located at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock, and 12 o'clock on the clock, and the remaining 8 ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 are It is located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock. In the present embodiment, the position of the 6 o'clock portion is set as the specific position of the rotating decorative body 3210.

In this normal state, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (FIG. FIG. See 43).

In the state where the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, a plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in a circle along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and both left and right ends are sideways. Except for, all the rotating ornaments 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in good condition. Further, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind is viewed from the front through the through hole 3229a (back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230) of the back second inner decorative body 3229. It can be visually recognized in good condition.

Then, in the normal state, the rotating decorative body 3210 located at the specific position of the 6 o'clock portion at the lowermost end is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. The outside is decorated with the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, the rotary decorative body 3210 at a specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002, and can decorate the rear of the first starting port 2002.

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3223 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 meshing with the drive gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshing with the transmission gear 3224b. The drive ring 3221 will rotate in the clockwise direction via the above. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotary decoration 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted in the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the shaft portion 3210a moves in the circumferential direction. The rotating body gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, in the clockwise direction). As a result, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotating ornaments 3210 revolve in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction respectively. Become.

In the present embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured so that each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates once when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees. ..

As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates in the clockwise direction, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate while revolving, and in a state where the normal rotating decorative body 3212 is located at a specific position, the rotation position. The detection sensor 3231 has detected the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has not detected the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 44 (a)).

Then, when the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotation decoration immediately before the special rotation decoration 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 44 (b) to (d) and 45 (e). ), (F).

When the drive ring 3221 further rotates in the clockwise direction and the special rotation decoration 3211 reaches a specific position, it corresponds to the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 into which the shaft portion 3210a of the special rotation decoration 3211 is inserted. The detection piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration body 3212 immediately before the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration body 3211 is inserted is inserted. The special detection piece 3221d protruding from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to the above is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 45 (g)). That is, when the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position.

The back second effect unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the direction opposite to the above, so that the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the opposite direction to the above. It can also be revolved in the counterclockwise direction.

Subsequently, the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 and the like. The plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are high-brightness full-color LEDs, respectively. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player side with the emitted color regardless of the decorative colors of the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229 arranged on the front side. can. That is, the rotating decoration body 3210, the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the back second inner decoration body 3229 can be light-emitting decorated with an appropriate color depending on the emission color of the LED 3241.

The plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 are 12 provided in a portion behind each of the rotating decorative bodies 3210 in a state where the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position (normal state). The rotating decorative body LED group 3250, the 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250, and the rear of the corner decorative portion 3228c of the back second outer decorative body 3228. The upper left corner LED group 3256 and the upper right corner LED group 3257 provided at the position, the lower left corner LED group 3258 provided behind the side unit 2200 and at the lower left corner, the starting port unit 2100 and the side. It is composed of a winning opening LED group 3259 provided in a portion behind each general winning opening 2001 of the unit 2200.

In the 12 rotating decorative body LED group 3250, the second rotating decorative body LED group 3250b and the third rotating decorative body LED group 3250b are set in the clockwise direction with the portion behind the specific position at the lowermost position as the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. Decorative LED group 3250c, 4th rotating decorative LED group 3250d, 5th rotating decorative LED group 3250e, 6th rotating decorative LED group 3250f, 7th rotating decorative LED group 3250g, 8th rotating decorative LED group 3250h , Ninth rotation decoration LED group 3250i, tenth rotation decoration LED group 3250j, eleventh rotation decoration LED group 3250k, and twelfth rotation decoration LED group 3250l. In the 12 rotating decorative LED groups 3250, the LEDs 3241 provided in each of the 12 rotating decorative LED groups 3250 are capable of independently emitting light.

In each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250, radiation passing from the rotation center of the rotating decoration 3210 to the rotation center of the rotating decoration 3210 and the rotation center of the rotating decoration 3210 centered on the rotation center of the rotating decoration 3210. It is divided into four parts: a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254. The four first LED groups 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 constituting one rotating decorative LED group 3250 have LEDs 3241 provided respectively. It is said that it can emit light independently

The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is on the revolution center side (inside) of the rotation center of the rotation decoration body 3210, and on the counterclockwise rotation direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation decoration body 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210 from the rotation center side with respect to the first LED group 3251. The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251. The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotating decoration body 3210 from the rotation center side with respect to the third LED group 3253.

The 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 have the portion adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction as the first intermediate LED group 3255a, and the second intermediate LED group 3255b in the clockwise direction. 3rd intermediate LED group 3255c, 4th intermediate LED group 3255d, 5th intermediate LED group 3255e, 6th intermediate LED group 3255f, 7th intermediate LED group 3255g, 8th intermediate LED group 3255h, 9th intermediate LED group 3255i, The ten intermediate LED group 3255j, the eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and the twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240. The rotating decoration body 3210 can be light-emitting decorated. That is, it is possible to show the player 12 circular luminous decorations arranged on the circumference. At this time, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be light-emitting decorated with a different color, or the special rotating decoration body 3211 can be light-emitting decorated with a different color from the normal rotating decoration body 3212.

Further, by causing the 12 rotating decorative LED groups 3250 to emit light in order in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decorative LED group 3250 is made to emit light, the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative LED group 3250 and the rotating decorative LED group 3250 may be made to emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating decorative LED groups 3250 is supplemented by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, and the light emitting effect of turning more smoothly can be shown to the player.

Further, in each of the rotating decorative LED groups 3250, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are divided into four, for example, the first. After the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are made to emit light, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, and then the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are adjacent to each other. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is made to emit light, the player can be shown a light emitting effect that turns more smoothly and a light emitting effect that turns in small steps. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the above-mentioned light emitting effect is performed according to the revolution speed of the rotating decorative body 3210, the LED is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 itself. It is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light as if it were.

Further, in each of the rotating decorative LED groups 3250, for example, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, the first LED group 3251, and so on. By emitting light in any order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in one rotating decorative LED group 3250. As a result, when the rotating decoration body 3210 is stopped in the normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light in order. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (rotating) in a state where it is not revolving.

Further, in each of the rotating decorative LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the outside from the center. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that moves to and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown a light emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

Further, by simultaneously emitting the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, the annular light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. At this time, by increasing the brightness of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize (make it difficult to see) the shape of the rotating decoration body 3210 or the like. Thereby, for example, in a state where the rotating decoration body 3210 is made difficult to see by increasing the brightness and the rotating decoration body 3210 is made to emit light in a ring shape, the rotating decoration body 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotating decoration body 3211. After that, by lowering the brightness or turning off the light, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be easily seen, so that the player can see the effect that the rotating decoration body 3210 is moving unknowingly.

As described above, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emission is performed by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240. You can produce. Further, by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 51 is a front view showing a drive mechanism and a decorative substrate in the back third effect unit with the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is installed in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200.

The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted in the back box 3010, and has a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301. The lower unit 3330 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the unit, the left unit 3350 provided at the left portion of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and the right portion unit 3370 provided at the right portion of the front surface of the unit base 3301. And have.

The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 which is attached so as to be openable and closable near the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the unit base 3301 and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315, the back third upper drive motor 3320, which is attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301, and the rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third upper drive. Rotation of spur gear-shaped drive gear 3321 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3320, rotary link member 3322 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotary link member 3322. It is provided with a slide link member 3323 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311.

Further, the upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the opening / closing position of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 from the front side. The front cover 3325, the gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from the rear, and the slide link member 3323 are urged in the direction in which the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is closed. It is provided with a spring 3327 for the upper part.

The upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 has a first decorative body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a right side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3312. It is composed of a second decorative body 3313 which is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 with respect to the axis whose base end side extends back and forth. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend linearly and shortly from the base end side, and then have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the belly of the chord is further formed in a wavy shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in a semicircular shape of about 1/2 toward the same direction.

The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 extend from the proximal end side to the distal end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative portions 3311a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative portions 3311b along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3312 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3313 side with the shaft hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3312a as the center. The first gear portion 3312b, the link piece 3312c protruding from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and the long hole-shaped link slit 3312d penetrating the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. A transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d.

The second decorative body 3313 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3312 side with the shaft hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3313a as the center. It also has a second gear portion 3313b that meshes with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decorative body 3312 is rotated, the second decorative body 3313 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the first decorative body 3312 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. As a result, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is movable so that the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 open and close with the base end side as the center.

The upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313, respectively, and has the first LED 3316 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3311a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3311b. The second LED 3317 and the like are mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full-color LED and the second LED 3317 is a monochromatic LED.

The back third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third upper drive motor 3320 on the left side of the back third upper drive motor 3320. The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the drive gear 3321, and a crankpin 3322b that projects forward in a columnar shape from an eccentric position. The crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 described later.

The base end side of the slide link member 3323 is located near the back third upper drive motor 3320, and the tip end side is the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (a portion rotatably supported by the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311). ), And it is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322. The slide link member 3323 extends vertically on the proximal end side and has a transmission slit 3323a into which the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and the slide link member 3323 projects forward in a columnar shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312, and a detection piece 3323c detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 on the proximal end side.

The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and the lower end thereof is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322 and faces the tip side. It is bent like. Further, the slide link member 3323 has a hook portion 3323d on which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always urged to the right by the upper spring 3327 hooked on the hook portion 3323d.

In the upper unit 3310, under normal conditions, the slide link member 3323 is located at the moving end to the right, and the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are farthest from each other and are the upper vertical ring. The decoration 3311 is in the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are respectively located near the upper edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is located at the bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a in the slide link member 3323. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324.

In this normal state, the tip side of each of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, so that the gravity applied to each of them causes. A rotational moment is acting on the tip sides of each to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3323 to move to the left via the link slit 3312d of the first decorative body 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. The force to move it toward you is acting. The force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the left causes a force for moving the crankpin 3322b to move to the left through the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323.

Since the crankpin 3322b is located below the center of rotation (the center of rotation of the rotation link member 3322) in the normal state, the crankpin 3322b is clockwise so as to move downward and to the left. It tries to revolve in the direction, but since the crankpin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b cannot revolve in the clockwise direction any more, and the crankpin 3322b revolves. There is no. That is, in the normal state, even if a force from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not close (move to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. It is locked in the state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3322 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back third upper drive motor 3320 via the drive gear 3321, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides to the left against the urging force of the upper spring 3327. When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the first decorative body 3312 moves downward through the link slit 3312d by the transmission pin 3323b at the tip, and counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3312a so that the tip side thereof moves downward. In addition to rotating in the direction, the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b causes the second decorative body 3313 to rotate in the clockwise direction about the shaft hole 3313a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3312 and the tip of the second decorative body 3313 rotate so as to be close to each other (so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed).

Further, as the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, so that the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

Then, the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crankpin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward, and the crankpin 3322b is normal. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the back third upper drive motor 3320 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

In the state of this appearance position, the urging force of the upper spring 3327 exerts a force for moving the slide link member 3323 to the right, so that the crankpin 3322b is subjected to the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. A force trying to move it to the right is acting. In the state of this appearance position, since the crankpin 3322b is located below the rotation center (rotation center of the rotation link member 3322), the crankpin 3322b moves counterclockwise so as to move downward and to the right. However, since the crankpin 3322b is located at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b cannot revolve in the counterclockwise direction any more, and the crankpin 3322b revolves. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not open (move to the standby position side) even if a force from the upper spring 3327 or the like acts, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. The load is cut off from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 side to the back third upper drive motor 3320.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in a positioned state. When moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third upper drive motor 3320 is used as described above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 by a constant current drive method, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is placed in the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 which is attached so as to be openable and closable near the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the unit base 3301 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335, the back third lower drive motor 3340, which is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301, and the rotating shaft protrudes to the rear of the unit base 3301, and the back third lower drive. Rotation of spur gear-shaped drive gear 3341 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3340, a rotary link member 3342 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3341 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3342. It is provided with a slide link member 3343 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331.

Further, the lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the opening / closing position of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 and a part of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the front side. The front cover 3345, the gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and the slide link member 3343 are urged in the direction in which the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is closed. It is equipped with a lower spring 3347.

The lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 has a first decorative body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and a left side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3332. It is composed of a second decorative body 3333 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 with respect to the axis extending back and forth. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line except for a part. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend linearly and shortly from the base end side, and then have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the belly of the chord is further formed in a wavy shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in a semicircular shape of about 1/2 toward the same direction.

The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 extend from the proximal end side to the distal end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative portions 3331a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative portions 3331b along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3332 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3333 side with the shaft hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3332a as the center. The first gear portion 3332b, the link piece 3332c protruding from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and the long hole-shaped link slit 3332d penetrating the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. And have. A transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d.

The second decorative body 3333 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3332 side with the shaft hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3333a as the center. It also has a second gear portion 3333b that meshes with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decorative body 3332 is rotated, the second decorative body 3333 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the first decorative body 3332 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is movable so that the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 open and close with the base end side as the center.

The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, respectively, and has a first LED 3336 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3331a and a rear surface of the small-diameter decorative portion 3331b. The second LED 3337 and the like are mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full-color LED and the second LED 3337 is a monochromatic LED.

The back third lower drive motor 3340 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position at the same height as the rotation axis of the back third lower drive motor 3340 on the right side of the back third lower drive motor 3340. The rotary link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crankpin 3342b that projects forward in a columnar shape from an eccentric position. The crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343, which will be described later.

The base end side of the slide link member 3343 is located near the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the tip end side is a portion rotatably supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (lower vertical ring decoration 3331). ), And it is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342. The slide link member 3343 extends vertically on the proximal end side and has a transmission slit 3343a into which the crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and the slide link member 3343 projects forward in a columnar shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3343b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c that is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 on the proximal end side.

The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, the upper end thereof is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and is directed toward the tip side. It is bent like. Further, the slide link member 3343 has a hook portion 3343d on which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always urged to the left by the lower spring 3347 hooked on the hook portion 3343d.

In the lower unit 3330, under normal conditions, the slide link member 3343 is located at the moving end to the left, and the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are farthest from each other and are the lower vertical ring. The decoration 3331 is in the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are respectively located near the lower edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is located at the bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a in the slide link member 3343. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344.

In this normal state, the tip side of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is away from the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and therefore, due to the gravity applied to each. A rotational moment is acting on the tip sides of each to approach each other, and the rotational moment causes the slide link member 3343 to move to the right via the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. The force to move it toward you is acting. The force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the right causes a force for moving the crankpin 3342b to move to the right through the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343.

Since the crankpin 3342b is located above the center of rotation (center of rotation of the rotation link member 3342) in the normal state, the crankpin 3342b is clockwise so as to move upward and to the right. It tries to revolve in the direction, but since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve in the clockwise direction any more, and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is no. That is, in the normal state, even if a force from the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 side is applied, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open further and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back third lower drive motor 3340 via the drive gear 3341, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides to the right against the urging force of the lower spring 3347. When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the first decorative body 3332 moves upward through the link slit 3332d by the transmission pin 3343b at the tip, and counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3332a so that the tip side thereof moves upward. In addition to rotating in the direction, the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b causes the second decorative body 3333 to rotate in the clockwise direction about the shaft hole 3333a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3332 and the tip of the second decorative body 3333 rotate so as to be close to each other (so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed).

Further, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

Then, the crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crankpin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, and the crankpin 3342b is normal. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is located near the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the drive of the back third lower drive motor 3340 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

In the state of this appearance position, the urging force of the lower spring 3347 exerts a force for moving the slide link member 3343 to the left, so that the crankpin 3342b is subjected to the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. A force that tries to move it to the left is acting. In the state of this appearance position, since the crankpin 3342b is located above the center of rotation (the center of rotation of the rotation link member 3342), the crankpin 3342b moves counterclockwise so as to move upward and to the left. However, since the crank pin 3342b is located at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve in the counterclockwise direction any more, and the crank pin 3342b revolves. There is nothing to do. That is, in the state of the appearance position, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open (move to the standby position side) even if a force from the lower spring 3347 or the like acts, and the state of the appearance position remains closed. The load is cut off from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the back third lower drive motor 3340.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 (first decoration 3332 and second decoration 3333) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in a positioned state. When moving the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third lower drive motor 3340 is used as described above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third lower drive motor 3340.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3341 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third lower drive motor 3340 by a constant current drive method, and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is placed in the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The left unit 3350 of the back third effect unit 3300 is located on the rear side of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 which are attached so as to be openable and closable near the center in the vertical direction in the left part of the unit base 3301. The left horizontal ring decorative board 3355 attached, the back third left drive motor 3360 mounted in the upper left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301, and the rotating shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, and the back third. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3361 attached to the rotary shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotary link member 3362 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3362. It is provided with a slide link member 3363 that slides up and down in the vertical direction to open and close the left lateral ring decorative body 3351.

Further, the left unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the left detection sensor 3364 that detects the opening / closing position of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and a part of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 from the front side. It includes a front cover 3365 and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3361 from the rear.

The left lateral ring decorative body 3351 has a first decorative body 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and an upper side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3352. It is composed of a second decorative body 3353 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the horizon, except for a part. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend linearly and shortly from the base end side, and then have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the belly of the chord is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in a semicircular shape of about 1/2 toward the same direction.

The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 extend from the proximal end side to the distal end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative portions 3351a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative portions 3351b along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3352 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the second decorative body 3353 side with the shaft hole 3352a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3352a as the center. The first gear portion 3352b, the link piece 3352c protruding from the proximal end side to the opposite side to the distal end side, and the elongated link slit 3352d penetrating the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. And have. A transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d.

The second decorative body 3353 is provided in an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3352 side with the shaft hole 3353a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and the shaft hole 3353a as the center. It also has a second gear portion 3353b that meshes with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decorative body 3352 is rotated, the second decorative body 3353 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the first decorative body 3352 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. As a result, the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is movable so that the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 open and close with the base end side as the center.

The left horizontal ring decorative substrate 3355 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, respectively, and has the first LED 3356 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3351a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3351b. The second LED 3357 and the like are mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full-color LED and the second LED 3357 is a monochromatic LED.

The back third left drive motor 3360 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third left drive motor 3360 below the back third left drive motor 3360. The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crankpin 3362b that projects forward in a columnar shape from an eccentric position. The crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363, which will be described later.

The base end side of the slide link member 3363 is located near the back third left drive motor 3360, and the tip end side is a portion rotatably supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction (left lateral ring decoration 3351). ), And it is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided on the left side of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362. The slide link member 3363 extends to the left and right on the proximal end side and has a transmission slit 3363a into which the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and the slide link member 3363 projects forward in a columnar shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c that is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the proximal end side.

The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and the right end is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362 and faces the tip side. It is bent like.

In the left unit 3350, under normal conditions, the slide link member 3363 is located at the upward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are farthest from each other and are left lateral rings. The decoration 3351 is in the most open standby position. In the state where the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is in the standby position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are respectively located near the left edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is located at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364.

In this normal state, the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is closer to the rotation center. It is located on the right side. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353, a rotational moment that tends to rotate in the clockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3352 and the first gear portion 3352b of the first decorative body 3352. Since the second gear portion 3353b of the second decorative body 3353 is meshed with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moments applied to each of the two decorative bodies 3353 are offset and maintained in the standby position. As a result, from the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 side, a force for sliding the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b hardly acts, and the left lateral ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 left in the transmission slit 3363a. It revolves so as to slide in the direction, and the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the transmission pin 3363b at the tip causes the first decorative body 3352 to move upward through the link slit 3352d in a counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3352a. The second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b causes the second decorative body 3353 to rotate in the clockwise direction about the shaft hole 3353a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3352 and the tip of the second decorative body 3353 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is closed).

Further, as the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward together, so that the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

Then, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves in the counterclockwise direction, so that the crankpin 3362b slides to the left in the transmission slit 3363a and then to the right, and the crankpin 3362b When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is located near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the drive of the back third left drive motor 3360 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are close to each other so that the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

In the state of this appearance position, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 of the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 are in a state of extending to the right from the respective rotation centers, so that the first decorative body 3352 The rotational moments that try to rotate in the clockwise direction act on the second decorative body 3353, respectively, but the first gear portion 3352b and the second decorative body 3353 of the first decorative body 3352 Since the second gear portion 3353b is meshed with each other, the rotational moments applied to each of them cancel each other out and are maintained in the state of the appearance position. As a result, from the left lateral ring decoration body 3351 side, a force for sliding the slide link member 3323 in the vertical direction via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b hardly acts, and the left lateral ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 (first decoration 3352 and second decoration 3353) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in a positioned state. When moving the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is used as described above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the left unit 3350, the left lateral ring decoration 3351 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third upper drive motor 3320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3361 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third left drive motor 3360 by a constant current drive method, and the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is placed in the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The right side unit 3370 of the back third effect unit 3300 is located behind the right side ring decoration 3371 and the right side ring decoration 3371 that are openably and closably attached near the center in the vertical direction in the right part of the unit base 3301. The right lateral ring decorative board 3375 attached, the back third right drive motor 3380 mounted in the lower right corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301, and the rotating shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, and the back third. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3381 attached to the rotating shaft of the right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382. It is provided with a slide link member 3383 that slides up and down in the vertical direction to open and close the right lateral ring decorative body 3371.

Further, the right unit 3370 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the right detection sensor 3384 that detects the opening / closing position of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and a part of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the front side. It includes a front cover 3385 and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3381 from the rear.

The right lateral ring decorative body 3371 has a first decorative body 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and an upper side of the base end side of the first decorative body 3372. It is composed of a second decorative body 3373, which is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 with respect to the axis whose base end side extends in the front-rear direction. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed vertically symmetrically with respect to the horizon, except for a part. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend linearly and shortly from the base end side, and then have a substantially semicircular shape so that the extension line of the linear portion from the tip end faces the inside of the belly of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the belly of the chord is further formed in a wavy shape extending in a direction away from the base end side in a semicircular shape of about 1/2 toward the same direction.

The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 extend from the proximal end side to the distal end side with a substantially constant width. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative portions 3371a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative portions 3371b along the extending direction.

The first decorative body 3372 is provided in an arc shape so as to have a shaft hole 3372a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and facing the second decorative body 3373 side with the shaft hole 3372a as the center. The first gear portion 3372b, the link piece 3372c protruding from the proximal end side to the opposite side to the distal end side, and the elongated link slit 3372d penetrating the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. And have. A transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d.

The second decorative body 3373 is provided with a shaft hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side and an arc shape so as to face the first decorative body 3372 side with the shaft hole 3373a as the center. It also has a second gear portion 3373b that meshes with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decorative body 3372 is rotated, the second decorative body 3373 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the first decorative body 3372 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is movable so that the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 open and close with the base end side as the center.

The right horizontal ring decorative substrate 3375 is attached to the rear surfaces of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, respectively, and has the first LED 3376 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3371a and the rear of the small-diameter decorative portion 3371b. The second LED 3377 and the like are mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full-color LED and the second LED 3377 is a monochromatic LED.

The back third right drive motor 3380 uses a motor having a high drive torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the back third right drive motor 3380 above the back third right drive motor 3380. The rotary link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crankpin 3382b that projects forward in a columnar shape from an eccentric position. The crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383, which will be described later.

The base end side of the slide link member 3383 is located near the back third right drive motor 3380, and the tip end side is a portion rotatably supported by the center of the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction (right horizontal ring decoration 3371). ), And it is slidably attached to the unit base 3301 in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. The slide link member 3383 extends to the left and right on the proximal end side, and has a transmission slit 3383a into which the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and the slide link member 3383 projects forward in a columnar shape on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3383b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decorative body 3372, and a detection piece 3383c that is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the proximal end side.

The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and the tip side is It bends toward the other side.

In the right side unit 3370, under normal conditions, the slide link member 3383 is located at the upward moving end, and the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are farthest from each other to the right lateral ring. The decorative body 3371 is in the most open standby position. When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are respectively located near the right edge in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Further, in a normal state, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is located at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. Further, under normal conditions, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384.

In this normal state, the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 approach the vertical line passing through the respective rotation centers, and the center of gravity is closer to the rotation center. It is located on the left. Therefore, in the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373, a rotational moment that tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction acts on each of the first decorative body 3372 and the first gear portion 3372b of the first decorative body 3372. Since the second gear portion 3373b of the second decorative body 3373 is meshed with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moments applied to each of the second decorative bodies 3373 are offset and maintained in the standby position. As a result, the force for sliding the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts from the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 side via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b, and the right lateral ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise by the back third right drive motor 3380 via the drive gear 3381, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 moves to the right in the transmission slit 3383a. The slide link member 3383 slides downward as it revolves so as to slide toward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the transmission pin 3383b at the tip causes the first decorative body 3372 to move upward through the link slit 3372d in the clockwise direction around the shaft hole 3372a. Along with the rotation, the second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b causes the second decorative body 3373 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3373a. That is, the tip of the first decorative body 3372 and the tip of the second decorative body 3373 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed).

Further, as the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward together, so that the right detection sensor 3384 is in a non-detection state.

Then, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 revolves in the clockwise direction, so that the crankpin 3382b slides to the right and then to the left in the transmission slit 3383a, and the crankpin 3382b normally slides to the left. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the above state and is located near the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (to the left of the center of revolution), the drive of the back third right drive motor 3380 is stopped. In this state, the tips of the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are in close proximity to each other so that the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is closed. The state of the appearance position is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated by 50 degrees from the state of the standby position.

In the state of this appearance position, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in a state of extending to the left from the respective rotation centers, so that the first decorative body 3372 And the second decorative body 3373, the rotational moments that try to rotate in the counterclockwise direction act on each of the first decorative body 3372, the first gear portion 3372b, and the second decorative body 3373. Since the second gear portion 3373b of the above is meshed with each other, the rotational moments applied to each of them are canceled out and maintained in the state of the appearance position. As a result, the force for sliding the slide link member 3383 in the vertical direction hardly acts from the right lateral ring decoration body 3371 side via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b, and the right lateral ring decoration There is almost no load applied to the back third right drive motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated by 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position side, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (first decoration 3372 and second decoration 3373) is placed in the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in a positioned state. When moving the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third right drive motor 3380 is used as described above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. Can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the right unit 3370, the right lateral ring decoration 3371 can be opened and closed between the open standby position state and the closed appearance position state by the back third right drive motor 3380.

Further, in the present embodiment, the drive gear 3381 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third right drive motor 3380 by a constant current drive method, and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is placed in the standby position and the appearance position. It can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

In the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 of the back third effect unit 3300 are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Further, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are provided at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are provided behind by the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331.

In this embodiment, a two-phase stepping motor is used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, 200 pps (width of 1 pulse is 5 ms) with the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 attached. It is supposed to be driven by, and it can be self-started even if it is excited by a pulse of 200 pps without slow-up processing from the stopped state.

Further, since the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position is completed at 130 steps, [130 steps × 5 ms. = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear or evacuate (appear / evacuate) at 650 ms.

Subsequently, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 in the back third effect unit 3300 will be described. Under normal conditions, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third production unit 3300 are in the standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are in the standby position, the back second effect unit 3200 arranged in front is the back. (Ii) It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the inner decorative body 3229, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, In front view, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, and the decoration in which the three rings are lined up vertically (upper and lower) is displayed. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 54).

Further, in a normal state, when the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to move the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position. In front view, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other in the center of the frame of the unit base 3301, and the three rings are arranged side by side (left and right). Can be shown to the player (see Figure 55).

Further, under normal conditions, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively, the upper vertical is at the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 in the front view. The tip of the ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are in close contact with each other, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are in close contact with each other. The decoration in which the rings are arranged in vertical and horizontal crosses can be shown to the player (see FIG. 56).

Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, in a normal state, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. Is moved from the standby position to a position in the middle of the appearance position, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (first decoration 3312 and second decoration 3313) and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (first). The tip portion of the decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373) is located inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the back second effect unit 3200 in the front view, and is partially on the player side. Visible from (see FIG. 57). In this state, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear in the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371-2. Since one tip appears in the upper and lower right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 can be changed. can.

As described above, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are appropriately combined. By moving to the appearance position with, the decoration of the ring arranged vertically, horizontally, or in a cross can be made to appear, and various movable effects can be shown to the player.

Further, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decorative substrate 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335, the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3357 of the left horizontal ring decorative substrate 3355, and the right horizontal ring. By appropriately causing the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decorative substrate 3375 to emit light, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are luminescently decorated. Therefore, it is possible to show the player various light emission effects.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 60 and the like. FIG. 52 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating in a clockwise direction from a normal state. FIG. 53 is a front view showing an enlarged lower portion of the game board in a state where the special rotating decorative body in the back second effect unit is moved to a specific position. FIG. 54 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third effect unit in a state of being moved to the appearance position. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board showing the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit in a state of being moved to the appearance position. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit in a state of being moved to the appearance position. be. FIG. 57 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position.

Further, FIG. 58 is a front view of a game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the back-up third effect unit. FIG. 59 is a front view of a game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during a light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where the game board is facing from the game window of the door frame.

In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, etc., which divide the rear end of the game area 5a, are substantially as a whole. Since it is transparently formed, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, through them. The back first upper decorative body 3161, the back first left decorative body 3162, the back first right decorative body 3163, the back first lower decorative body 3164, and the back second directing unit 3200 in the back first effect unit 3100. Good visibility of the decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211 and the normal rotating decorative body 3212), the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the like. Can be done.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 24 and the like, four special rotating decorations 3211 out of a plurality of rotating decorations 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 are arranged at both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution orbit. , Located at both ends in the left-right direction. That is, one special rotating ornament 3211 is located at the lowermost specific position (6 o'clock portion in the clock) on the revolution orbit. The special rotating decorative body 3211 located at this specific position is located in the center of the back first lower decorative body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outside is the back first lower decorative body 3164. It is in a state of being decorated by. Further, the special rotating decorative body 3211 (rotating decorative body 3210) at a specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 53).

Further, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are in the standby position, respectively. In front view, it is located outside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200, so that the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, a drive ring 3221, and a back second outer side. It is covered with the decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is invisible from the player side.

In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 is displayed on the player side (front). It can be visually recognized in good condition.

The game board 5 has the back first of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable effect.

First, the effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. As an effect using a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the back second drive motor 3222. , A plurality of (12 pieces) rotating decorative bodies 3210 can perform a movable effect of revolving in the clockwise direction while rotating in the clockwise direction. As a result, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve (orbit) around the effect image that can be seen through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 while rotating. 5a can be made lively and the player can be entertained.

As described above, in a state where a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 is made to emit light, the rear is rotated decorative body. Since the substantially annular back first lower decorative body 3164 around the 3210 emits light, the player's attention can be directed to the back first lower decorative body 3164. Further, since the back first lower decorative body 3164 is conspicuous, the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164 for the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

At this time, of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250, only the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decorative body 3210 passing through the rear side in the annulus of the back first lower decorative body 3164 can be clearly seen, and the other rotating decorative bodies 3210 are difficult to see. Therefore, the back first lower decorative body 3164 It is possible to show the player an effect such as a roulette or a slot with the inside of the annulus as a window, and further enhance the feeling of excitement as to whether or not the desired rotating decoration 3210 stops at a specific position. Can be done.

Then, when the desired rotating decorative body 3210 (special rotating decorative body 3211) stops in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decorative body 3164, as shown in FIG. 53, the starting port unit 2100 is in front of the rotating decorative body 3210. Since the first starting port 2002 of the above is provided, if the player is made to accept the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, it makes us think that there is an extremely high possibility that a "big hit" will be drawn. It is possible to urge the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002, and to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B.

Further, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating by being driven by the back second decorative body 3222, a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative board 3240 are appropriately used according to the moving position of each rotating decorative body 3210. It may be made to emit light. For example, when one rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are combined. At the same time as turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the first LED group 3251 and the first LED group 3251 while keeping the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 lit. (2) The LED group 3252 is turned off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Further, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off to turn off the rotating decoration body LED group 3250, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. Leave it as it is.

Subsequently, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 are turned on to light the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. The 3254 is left off and the intermediate LED group 3255 is left on. Then, when the rotating decoration body 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the first position (the next rotating decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to turn on the rotating decoration body LED. The group 3250 is turned on and the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. As a result, the LED 3241 in which the rotating decoration body 3210 is located in front is turned on, and the LED 3241 in which the rotating decoration body 3210 is not located in front is turned off. As if an LED is provided on its own, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 is revolving while emitting light, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, under the normal state, all the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are made to emit light with high brightness, and then a plurality of rotary decorations are performed by the back second drive motor 3222. The body 3210 is rotated and revolved, and the rotation and revolution of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are stopped in a state different from the normal state, so that the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are turned off or dimmed. May be. As a result, all the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. Therefore, the rotating decorative body is in that state. By changing the position of the 3210, it is possible to show the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 can appropriately emit light, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is generated from the first rotating decorative body LED group 3250a. , 2nd rotation decoration LED group 3250b, 3rd rotation decoration LED group 3250c, 4th rotation decoration LED group 3250d, 5th rotation decoration LED group 3250e, 6th rotation decoration LED group 3250f, 7th rotation decoration Body LED group 3250g, 8th rotation decoration body LED group 3250h, 9th rotation decoration body LED group 3250i, 10th rotation decoration body LED group 3250j, 11th rotation decoration body LED group 3250k, 12th rotation decoration body LED group By emitting (lighting) the light in order such as 3250l, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in a predetermined direction, and the player can be entertained. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the player's expectation can be raised and the player can be entertained depending on the position at which the rotation of the light is stopped.

When the rotation of the light is stopped, the rotation speed of the light is gradually reduced, and in the rotating decorative LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3250. The LED group 3254 and further, the intermediate LED group 3255 may be turned on in order so that the light moves in small steps in the rotation direction and stops slowly. As a result, the position where the light stops becomes finer, so that it is difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light stops, and the player can be annoyed and entertained.

In addition, as described above, the light can be rotated (circulated), so by turning it on and off in order in the circumferential direction, a light emission effect that measures the time like a clock and the remaining time can be obtained. It is also possible to perform a light emission effect that suggests, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in each of the rotating decorative LED groups 3250, for example, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, the fourth LED group 3254, the first LED group 3251, and so on. The light may be emitted in any order. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 in one place, and the rotating decorative body 3210 is not revolving to the player. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is rotating (rotating), and the player can be entertained.

Further, in each of the rotating decorative LED groups 3250, for example, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light and then the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the outside from the center. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that moves to and spreads. Alternatively, when the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are made to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are made to emit light, the player is shown a light emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center. be able to.

Subsequently, the effect using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 are driven by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 from a normal state. Move from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, in the front view, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are in close contact with each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, and the three rings are vertically (3 rings). The decorations lined up (upper and lower) can be shown to the player.

Further, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 55, the back third left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from a normal state to decorate the left lateral ring. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position. As a result, in the front view, the tip of the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 and the tip of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are in close contact with each other at the center inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, and the three rings are lateral (three rings). The decorations lined up on the left and right) can be shown to the player.

In the present embodiment, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are moved to the appearance positions to form a decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side. The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed in the part of the display device 1600 which is inside each of the three rings. It is possible to make a variable display of three symbol rows for suggestion. As a result, the top and bottom of the three symbol rows are increased as compared with the case where the three symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner without moving the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position. Since it is physically decorated by the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol row that is variablely displayed to the player is a game such as "big hit". It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that the stop display is made with a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game.

Further, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 56, from the normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, And the back third right drive motor 3380 is driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively. Move it. As a result, at the center inside the inner second inner peripheral decorative body 3230, the tip of the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 are in close contact with each other, and the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 is in a state of being close to each other. The tip and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are in close contact with each other, and the player can see the decoration in which the five rings are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, Since a decoration in which five rings are lined up in a cross is formed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it is considered that an advantageous gaming state such as "big hit" will occur in which the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the "big hit" game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. May be. For example, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 can be moved to the appearance positions in this order, or the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring can be moved. The decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 may be moved to the appearance positions in this order. As a result, the five rings are arranged in a cross shape through multiple stages, so that the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not to move to the next stage at each stage. Can be entertained.

By the way, in the back third effect unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are increased by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are operated for an extremely short time of one second or less (here, 650 ms). ), It is possible to move from the standby position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the standby position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, which gives a strong impact to the player. Can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven from a normal state to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. And the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved from the standby position to the position on the way to the appearance position. As a result, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 (first decoration body 3312 and second decoration body 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 (first decoration body 3372 and second decoration body 3373) However, it is located inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the front view, and can be partially visually recognized from the player side.

More specifically, in the state of FIG. 57, the two tips of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear in the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229. The two tips of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 appear in the upper and lower right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229. As a result, the shape of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 facing the display screen of the effect display device 1600 to the rear changes, so that the player can see the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decorative body. It is possible to make the movement of 3371 easier to notice, and it is possible to make the player feel that something will happen and raise the expectation for the game.

When moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portion can be visually recognized. It may be moved halfway and moved to the appearance position as the next step. As a result, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the player completely moves to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small steps to and from the standby position, and the inner shape of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 changes in small steps, so that the player Can be made easier to notice.

In the back third effect unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and the second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decorative board 3315, the first LED 3336 and the second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decorative board 3335, and the first LED 3356 and the second LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decorative board 3355. (2) LED3357, the first LED3376 and the second LED3377 of the right horizontal ring decorative substrate 3375 are appropriately made to emit light, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have moved to the appearance position side can be luminescently decorated in various light emitting modes. , Can entertain the player.

By the way, in the present embodiment, in the back third effect unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance positions. Occasionally, as the effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, they are placed directly behind the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371. The decorative image 3390 similar to the above is displayed (see FIG. 58).

Further, in the present embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 is , Even if the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is executed when it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position. , They are kept in the standby position so as not to be moved to the appearance position side, and the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 58). As a result, even if a defect occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the defect by seeing the decorative image 3390. By recognizing it, it is possible to prevent the player from having to interrupt the game and feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to continue to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as the effect using the back unit 3000, an effect in which the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300 can be appropriately combined can be performed. As a result, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player a more multi-stage production, it is possible to make the player feel excited at each stage, raise the expectation of the player, and suppress the decline in the interest. can.

Further, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when an appropriate light emitting effect is executed using the back first effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, and the back third effect unit 3300, a specific light emitting effect is performed. While turning off the LED located on the line, it is possible to perform a shadow effect in which the line is moved from one side to the other side in a predetermined direction in a short time (1 second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See FIG. 59). As a result, by turning off the LED on the specific line, a dark part (shadow part 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow part 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel "haha", and to make them feel that something will happen and concentrate on the game. The shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the diagonal direction.

Further, the above shadow effect is a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3210, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the like. It can also be executed at the time of switching the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the like. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movable effect, the effect image, and the like with the shadow effect as a delimiter, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 60, the inside of the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Then, in the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is covered with a semi-tube-shaped dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, and a door frame right side decoration. It is surrounded by a body 419 and a door frame top decorative body 453. Further, in the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453. Behind, dish upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left Since the decorative substrate 456 and the decorative substrate 457 on the right side of the door frame top are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. , Light can be moved along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

As described above, since the game board 5 of the present embodiment can perform various light emitting effects, for example, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 of the back second effect unit 3200, the second. By emitting light in the order of the LED group 3252, the fourth LED group 3254, and the LED of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that moves from the center to the outside and spreads. Can be directed to the outside of the gaming area 5a. Alternatively, when the LED of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 of the back second effect unit 3200, the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are emitted in this order, the light is emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that converges from the outside to the center, and it is possible to direct the player's attention to the center of the game area 5a.

Further, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, when the light is rotated (swirl) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, the door frame 3 side. Also, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a may be executed. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light rotates around the entire pachinko machine 1 centering on the center of the game area 5a, which can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. It is possible to avoid it, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and the players can be less likely to get bored, and various effects can be used. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, under normal conditions, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 and the lower vertical ring decoration body of the lower unit 3330 in the back unit 3000. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are placed in the central portion of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second production unit 3200). By rotating it outward from the inner circumference of the decorative body 3230) to bring it into the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body are decorated. The body 3371 will be located behind the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 of the back second effect unit 3200, and will rotate. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 by the decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, the back second inner decoration 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230. , And the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 can be made invisible to the player. In addition to making it difficult to notice the presence of the right lateral ring decorative body 3371, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a can be satisfactorily displayed from the player side (front). It can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the directed image.

In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this implementation). In the embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 rotates (moves) from the retracted position to the appearance position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds)), so that the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third The three left drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with a high torque, and the torque is increased. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have stopped due to the height, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, Since the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be rotated to the appearance position at an extremely high speed, the upper vertical ring decoration that the player did not recognize. The 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can show the player an effect as if they suddenly appeared in the central part of the game area 5a. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly and instantly appear to the player. It makes me strongly think that there is something good, and it can raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive method. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 were rotated with high torque, they quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position. This is because the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. , The player can immediately recognize the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position. The movement of the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can greatly surprise the player.

Further, the portions of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 between the base end side and the tip end side are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. Since it is located on the rear side of the straight line connecting the proximal end side and the distal end side at the time of rotation, a shape extending non-linearly between the proximal end side and the distal end side (here, an arc). Therefore, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position, the first The tip side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 becomes visible. At this time, the portions (tip side) that are visible from the front in the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are the base ends. Since there is a non-linear shape between the side and the tip side, the directions protruding inward from the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. The direction is different from the direction of the base end side of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are stopped rotating on the way to the appearance position side, and only the tip side can be visually recognized. When the possible effects are performed (see FIG. 57), the player is different from the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. Since it is possible to make the illusion that another decorative body is appearing, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are placed on the base end side in the central portion of the game area 5a (the back second inner peripheral decoration). Since it is rotatably supported on the outside of 3230) and has an elongated frame shape that extends to the center of the game area 5a at the time of appearance, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring When the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated to the appearance positions, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decoration 3371 is located in the center of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance positions are located. Can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

Further, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by the peripheral control board 1510 by a constant current drive method. The time when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by a high torque is set to 0. Since it is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with a higher torque than necessary, and the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, and the back third left The increase in space required for the drive motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380 can be suppressed, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 can be relatively suppressed. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and other members, and the secured space allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. The 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. can be made larger, and the large upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. can be used. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more. Further, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor having a higher torque than necessary or a complicated control circuit for outputting a high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. ..

Further, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring are provided. When the decorative body 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearance position or from the appearance position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened so that the player can see the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the movement of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, by brightening the display screen thereafter, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, It is possible to show the player the effect that the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear in the center or disappear from the center. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can entertain the player, and the player can be entertained. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 by a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring is decorated. Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. Although problems may easily occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance positions. Since the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect, a problem occurs in them, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration occur. Even if the 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decorative image 3390 allows the player to use the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. , Left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made to appear as if they have moved to the appearance position. It is possible to show the player the same effect as that of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and effect display control unit 1512) causes the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are invisible from the player side. Since the player has moved to the retracted position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized, and the effect image can be entertained by the player. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, it is appropriate. The number of upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decorations 3331, left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and right horizontal ring decorations 3371 appear in the effect display device 1600 at the timing of moving from the retracted position to the appearance position. A decorative image 3390 is displayed at a position behind the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the frame-shaped upper vertical ring decoration body 3390 is displayed. A plurality of specific effect images (for example, a plurality for suggesting a special lottery result drawn) in a portion partitioned by a ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration 3371. The specific effect image is clearly divided by the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the specific effect is displayed. The image can be made to stand out, and the production by the specific production image can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, for some reason, even one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, and the left horizontal ring are detected by the peripheral control board 1510. Since only the movement control of the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is suspended, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3351 are suspended. When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from the retracted position. In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays a decorative image 3390 at a position behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance position. At the same time, the specific effect image is displayed in the portion partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 (decorative image 3390) at the appearance position. Since it is displayed, it is an illusion to the player that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring can be made by the decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. The same effect as that produced by the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player. Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have a problem and cannot be moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring A decorative image 3390 similar to the decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 can be shown to the player, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 and the lower vertical ring The decorative image 3390 can show the player the same effect as the effect of the decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, and the decorative image 3390 can make the specific effect image stand out. It is possible to entertain the player with the production by the specific production image and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, if any one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position occurs. The movement control of all the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration are suspended. Since the 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and When the effect of moving the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position at the same time is performed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration that have moved to the appearance position are performed. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative image 3390, which can be visually recognized by not moving to the appearance position due to a defect with any of the body 3371, from being performed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. It can be prevented and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decorative image is displayed regardless of whether or not the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Since the 3390 is displayed, an image for when a problem occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is separately provided. It is not necessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decorative image 3390 can be reduced.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are provided by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. And when the problem that the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 does not move is detected, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended. Due to a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 stop at a halfway position and are incomplete. It is possible to prevent the effect from becoming unpleasant, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suspend only the movement control. The effect display device 1600 has a decorative image 3390. Is displayed, the decorative image 3390 can entertain the player, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended due to the detection of the defect, the upper vertical ring decoration is suspended. Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371. No overload acts on the motor 3360 and the back third right drive motor 3380, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 It is possible to prevent the other members from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the defect from spreading.

Further, in the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are invisible. Therefore, for some reason, the upper vertical ring decoration is invisible. Even if there is a problem that the 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 is decorated as described above. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the effect of the decorative image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retracted position can be enjoyed. Since the body 3371 cannot be seen, the player notices that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move. It can be made difficult, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving anxiety and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in a state where the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the evacuation position (normal state), the player is upward from the player side. Since the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the player can see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 in the retracted position. , Lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice, so that upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal When the ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration that were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are provided by the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384. The problem that the 3371 does not move to the appearance position is detected, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the retracted position are placed above. Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are used for detection, the peripheral control board 1510 is used to detect the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring. When the decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are moved and controlled to the appearance position, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 form the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. If the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are still detected, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are still detected. , And the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 has not moved, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. It is possible to detect a defect and embody a game machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

The decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration. It may be larger or smaller than the size of 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. When the decorative image 3390 is larger than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the decorative image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The 3390 has the advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decorative image 3390 is made smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3371. When the effect of moving the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left occur due to a defect. There is an advantage that the decorative image 3390 is not recognized by the player unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 is suspended.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a through hole 3329a penetrating the front and back. In front of the back second inner decorative body 3229, under normal conditions, four special rotating decorative bodies 3211 with special decorations and the remaining 6 with decorations different from the special rotating decorative bodies 3211. Twelve flat and translucent rotating ornaments 3210 composed of the ordinary rotating ornaments 3212 are centered on an axis extending back and forth so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. Along with being lined up on the circumference of the revolution, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the through hole 3229a faces. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotating decorative body 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. Along with the shaft portion 3210a, the rotating decorative body 3210 and the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a are on a circumference (revolving circle) whose radius is the distance from the rotation center of the drive ring 3221 to the shaft hole 3221a. Move (revolve) on the circumference. At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided on the revolving center side of the revolving circle in the unit base 3220, it rotates. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotating body gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolving direction of the rotating body gear 3225, and the rotating body gear 3225 rotates on the shaft portion 3210a and the rotating decorative body 3210. Together with this, it will rotate (rotate) around the axis extending back and forth of the shaft portion 3210a. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 by the back second drive motor 3222, a plurality of (12) rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction while rotating, which may give a strong impact to the player. It can attract the player's interest strongly, and at the same time, it can make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating around the axis extending back and forth are formed into a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotating decorative body 3210 is directed forward, and the entire rotating decorative body 3210 is a player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, it is possible to show the player how the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate around, creating a lively feeling. In addition to being able to make the player look like this, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and greatly entertain him, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, behind the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, and the back second inner decorative body 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decorative body 3210, the stop position (one) on the revolution circumference. A plurality of (12) rotating decoration LED groups 3250, which are behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 that have stopped revolving at a position (position where the rotating decoration 3210 stops revolving at a specific position) and are divided in the revolution direction, and each of them. Since the intermediate LED group 3255 located between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 composed of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are provided, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are in the stop position. When the LED 3241 of the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 is made to emit light in the state of, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be made to emit light decoration, and the intermediate LED group 3255 is in a state where the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210 are between the stop positions. When the LED 3241 emits light, the rotating decoration body 3210 can be made to emit light. Therefore, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolved while rotating, if the LED 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the LED 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 are appropriately emitted in accordance with the revolving rotation of the rotating decorative body 3210, the light is emitted. Since the LED 3241 moves together with the rotation of the rotating decoration body 3210, the light from the LED 3241 has a translucent back second outer decoration body 3228 and the back second inner decoration body 3229 and the rotation decoration. By irradiating the front (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decoration 3210 can be light-emitting-decorated as if the rotating decoration 3210 is provided with the LED 3241, and a plurality of light-emitting decorations can be made. By showing the player the effect that the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while rotating, the player can be greatly entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

At this time, a plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 with the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 and the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. Since it is divided into 3254, the LED 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be made to emit light finely according to the revolution of the rotating decoration 3210, so that only the LED 3241 located behind the rotating decoration 3210 can emit light. If the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player, and at the same time, the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 decorated with light emission can be seen. It can be more entertaining, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolving locus of the rotating decorative body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. When all the LEDs 3241 except the LED 3241 included in the upper left corner LED group 3257, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the winning opening LED group 3259 are made to emit light, a ring-shaped light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. Further, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are circumferentially provided. When the light is emitted alternately in the direction, the player can see the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates on the circumference. Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotating decoration body 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width, so that the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged inside the annular ring. By emitting light in order from the outside to the outside, the player can see the light emission effect that the ring of light spreads to the outside, or by making multiple LEDs 3241 emit light in order from the outside to the inside of the annulus, the ring of light can be emitted. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges inward. In this way, since various light emission effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored with various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, when performing a light emitting effect such that the light rotates in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration body 3210, each rotating decoration body LED group 3250 has the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration body 3210. Since it is divided into the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254, it is possible to make the movement of light in the revolution direction finer, so that the player can produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. Can be shown to. In addition, since the movement of light in the revolution direction of the rotating decoration body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be slowed down, and various light emission effects make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light.

In addition, by appropriately combining the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect of revolving the rotating decorative body 3210 while rotating, the player can produce an effect that could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and at the same time, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are controlled to emit light. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the control as compared with the case where a plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled one by one to emit light, and a problem occurs due to the occurrence of an overload, which is a pleasure for the player. It is possible to prevent the LED from being lowered, and the control circuit on the peripheral control board 1510 or the like can be simplified, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, since the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decoration body 3210, for example, only the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is provided at regular time intervals. If the speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction is different between the case where the light is emitted in order in the circumferential direction and the case where the rotating decorative LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately emitted in the circumferential direction at the same time interval. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emitting effect, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the player with the light emitting effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. can.

Further, since the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decorative body 3228 is provided. And since the LED 3241 of the back second decorative substrate 3240 is difficult to see from the front due to the back second inner decorative body 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decorative body 3210. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to make an illusion that the rotating decoration body 3210 is provided with the LED 3241, and it is possible to further enhance the impact of the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration body 3210 that revolves while rotating, and also to rotate. The effect of the decorative body 3210 can be further enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the special rotating decoration 3211 having a special decoration (three-way decoration) is provided in the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are revolved while rotating. At that time, depending on whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 revolves at a specific position, the player can be thrilled, and the player can enjoy the movable production by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 that detects that one rotation decoration body 3210 is located at a specific position on the revolutionary circumference including the stop position, and one special rotation decoration body 3211 are located at a specific position. Since it is equipped with a special rotation position detection sensor 3232 that detects the presence of the rotation position, only the rotation position detection sensor 3231 is provided when the normal rotation decoration body 3212 is located at a specific position among the plurality of rotation decoration bodies 3210. When the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation. By combining the detection by the position detection sensor 3232, it is possible to detect whether the normal rotation decoration body 3212 or the special rotation decoration body 3211 is located at a specific position. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 is revolved and stopped at a specific position, the normal rotating decorative body that revolves while rotating by using the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232. Since either the 3212 or the special rotating decorative body 3211 can be stopped revolving at a specific position, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotating decorative body 3211 revolves at a specific position. It is possible to make the player feel excited and entertained, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotation decoration body 3212 and the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at a specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotation decoration body 3211 located at the specific position. Since the 3221d is provided on the drive ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d do not rotate as compared with the case where the detection piece and the special detection piece are provided on the rotating decoration body 3210. , The configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be easily made, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect can be easily realized.

Further, since a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be revolved while rotating by one back second drive motor 3222, when the rotation and revolution of the rotary decoration 3210 are driven by different drive motors. In comparison, the configuration of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be simplified, the drive mechanism can be made smaller, and the control for the movable effect of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be controlled. The load can be reduced. Further, as described above, since the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reduced, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210. The rotary decorative body 3210 can be made larger to stand out from the player side, and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the shaft portion 3210a is projected to the rear of the LED 3241, the rotating body gear 3225 provided at the rear end is behind the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are naturally behind the LED 3241. , The rotating body gear 3225, the fixed gear portion 3220b, the drive ring 3221, and the like do not block the light radiated forward from the LED 3241, and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can be reliably emitted and decorated.

Further, since the back second drive motor 3222 for rotating the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221 and the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220b (inside of the through hole 3229a) can be widened, it faces the inside. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be more easily exhibited.

Further, since the drive ring 3221 is provided on the outside of the fixed gear portion 3220b and the back second drive motor 3222 is provided on the outside of the drive ring 3221, the back second drive motor 3222 is provided at substantially the same position as the position in the front-rear direction of the drive ring 3221. Since the two drive motors 3222 can be provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism applied to the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210. Further, the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are formed in a flat plate shape, and the thickness of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. From these facts, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the diameter of the rotating decoration body 3210 can be made larger by relatively widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decoration bodies 3210. It can be made to stand out from the player side, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, and other members can be provided in front of or behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. Therefore, by performing the production using other provided members, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of productions, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a from the left side along the peripheral edge is a gate as a privilege granting portion provided in the game area 5a. When the attacker unit 2400 passes through the section 2003 or is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, a predetermined privilege (for example, a normal lottery in which the player has an advantage). Since the result, the lottery of the special lottery result, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, the player is made to drive the game ball B aiming at the privilege granting part such as the gate part 2003. You can play games.

In the game area 5a, an upstream space portion 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and is provided on the downstream side of the upstream space portion 2511. Since the game ball B is distributed by different routes according to the driving strength and the distribution passage group 2520 provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003 is provided, the first distribution constituting the distribution passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side differs for each of the passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the game ball B is at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, which has a driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511 and has a high probability that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003. The driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the driving strength of the game ball B. It is possible to give a change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the desired entrance of the second distribution passage 2522. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, the abutment portion 1006 protrudes inward from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a near the right end of the upstream space portion 2511, and the entrance of the first flow passage 2521 is provided in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is driven with a strength of contacting the abutment portion 1006 (for example, a hitting strength higher than a specific value at which the game ball B is distributed (rolled) along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 will enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 in the circulation passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first distribution passage 2521, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutment portion 1006, and when aiming at another second distribution passage 2522, a strength that does not abut on the abutment portion 1006. It suffices to hit the game ball B with, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be sharpened, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

There is also an opportunity to reduce the probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 having an entrance provided in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 will pass through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side, and the privilege will be given. Since the ball is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, the player is made to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B, so that the player is less likely to get bored, and at the same time, the game aimed at the entrance of the remaining second distribution passage 2522 for the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is driven, the distribution passage group 2520 (first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2521) are distributed by different routes according to the driving strength of the game ball B. The distribution passage 2522) can be reliably embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be a pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522, it is upstream. It is necessary to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a with a driving strength that enters the space portion 2511 and with a driving strength that enters the desired first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B can be further increased, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other. Therefore, due to a slight difference in the driving strength of the game ball B, the game ball B Since the entrance of the distribution passage into which the player enters is likely to be different, the difficulty level of the player's driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B to reduce the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are integrated to some extent, so that the inside of the game area 5a or the center The frame of the character 2500 can be made relatively wide, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area 5a and the production within the frame of the center character 2500 to suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

In the above embodiment, the distribution passage group 2520 is shown to be composed of two distribution passages, the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be composed of two distribution passages.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 with a high probability by abutting on the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker right lower passage 2426 with a high probability.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction as the rotation direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may revolve in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation.

Further, in the above embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Although the display of the decorative image 3390 is shown when the effect using the above is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image without the decorative image 3390 is displayed when there is no problem in them. , The decorative image 3390 may be displayed only when a problem occurs in them.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation method, and high torque can be generated.

Further, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are shown as stepping motors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a DC motor having a large starting torque may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are rotated, and the back third upper drive motor 3320 is used. , Back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, and other drive motors are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and solenoids, rotary solenoids, and the like may be used. ..

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame effect display device 152, and a door frame sub based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a display unit 185 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the effect display device 1600. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 111.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. On the circuit, the RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value and the error display, and the game board 5. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a where the section is formed. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the register changes to a content that does not make sense, it forces the main control MPU to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is performed without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and the main control side power on processing described later is executed again. Will be to be done. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU. Only the MPU) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

Further, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control". It is described as "random number circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit, when the main control MPU is reset, first, a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU with one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. After extracting all the values in, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various sensors to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be used.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and the large winning opening 2005. Large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in, the first receiving entrance sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first entrance 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the large winning prize. The second inlet sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second inlet 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the game area 5a. Detection signals from the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibration, the out port sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, etc. are each. It is input via the main control I / O port.

Further, the respective detection signals from the setting key 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit and the payout control output described later). When they are input to the main control board 1310 as they are without going through the circuit), they are input to the input terminals of the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and are directly input to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the general winning opening sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first inlet / outlet sensor 2404, the second inlet / outlet sensor 2405, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the out opening sensor 3032. Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly to the input terminal of the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit. ..

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, whereby the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. Each drive signal to the solenoid 2414 can be output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or from the output terminal of the main control I / O port. , Ordinary hold indicator, 1st special hold indicator, 1st special hold indicator, 2nd special symbol indicator, 2nd special hold indicator, round indicator, etc. Output without going through the board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the main control I / O port based on these detection signals.

Further, the main control MPU outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the main control I / O port. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the main control I / O port, a signal (power failure clear signal) can be output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or from the output terminal of the main control I / O port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells that this launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when launching is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that reverses the launch permission logic when firing is not permitted. Is set to. In addition, the logic of the launch permission signal is set by the hardware including the main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the reverse of the launch permission logic as the initial value (default). Although it is configured, it is set to the launch permission logic after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored).

In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2101 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 is used. B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2403. Further, since the game ball B launched in the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B can be detected by the out port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out port sensor 3032. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the general winning opening sensor 3001. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 supplies power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off, in addition to the power switch 630a that can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. It is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for the purpose. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 130) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation. ..

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574, The detection signals from the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to the payout control input circuit and dispensed. It is input to the payout control MPU via the control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 110, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 111, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 111, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the firing timing control circuit, the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 111 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is satisfied, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching is not output toward the game area 5a, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 111. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and also controls the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 61, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the door frame effect based on the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310 and the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the first elevating drive motor 175b, the second elevating drive motor 182, etc. provided in the door frame 3, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door-side drive light emission data composed of the door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 or effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition to transmitting, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Multiple rotating decorations 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration of the back third effect unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotation position, movement position, etc. of the body 3351, the right lateral ring decoration body 3371, and the like are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 165 of the effect operation unit 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and variously from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 provided on the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the production are output. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4). By sending 1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board 1720 transmits a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LEDs (LED121a, LED122a, LED138a, LED153c, LED159a, lattice decoration LED195) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. , LED 213a, upper outer top LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, grid decoration LED 245, etc.) It is output to the LED of each decorative board.

Further, the effect drive board 1720 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the first elevating drive motor 175b and the second elevating drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3, and each drive provided in the game board 5. Output to a motor, etc.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 has a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a door frame effect display device 152, and an effect display. A VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and an image ROM that stores various data are stored in this image ROM. It is equipped with an image RAM in which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152. And the drawing control of the effect display device 1600. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and corresponding schedule data. Multiple control data (display commands) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is the order in which the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance according to the progress of the schedule data. It is stipulated.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Further, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" is a line buffer that holds drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and draws one line that is held in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting data to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display This will affect the speed of drawing on the device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, to explain the "sprite", the "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit grouped on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various characters on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set to the position where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites"), and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set. It is drawn at 1600.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 intersect with the main scan for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel in order from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction of the main scan. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is used as the main scan. When viewed from the left, the data is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 shift to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minute, the main scan is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is operated. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111, and the more the handle 111 is rotated, the stronger the striking can be. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts on the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at a position between the first shelf portion 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp inlet 2501. ..

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, While abutting on a plurality of obstacle nails N, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are discharged from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit. It may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 is on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). Upon entering the part 2511), it is discharged above the gate part 2003 of the center accessory 2500 through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and is gated. After contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the portion 2003, the passage through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

In the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first distribution passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance opening at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. It is composed of a second distribution passage 2522 and the like. As a result, when the game ball B is driven (so-called right-handed) with the strength of contacting the abutment portion 1006, the game ball B enters the first distribution passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2511, and hits the abutment portion 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (a strength that is weaker than right-handed hitting), it will enter the second distribution passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2511 circulates in either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first distribution passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 is not so much. It does not pass through and circulates on the right side of the gate portion 2003. On the other hand, the game ball B circulated through the second distribution passage 2522 is likely to be guided to the left side of the right side of the gate portion 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and is high. There is a probability that it will pass through the gate section 2003.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the attacker unit 2400. The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending results is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has passed the right side of the gate portion 2003 has an extremely high probability of being on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Enter the attacker right passage 2422. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate portion 2003 is provided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is very likely that it will be guided to the left of the attacker right passage 2422 and will enter the attacker left passage 2421 with a high probability.

The general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422, and when the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 enters the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability by abutting on the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, and is in a closed state. It circulates on the second starting door 2411. If the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 does not enter the second starting port guide shelf 2423, it enters the attacker right lower passage 2426 and is involved in the second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the second start opening door 2411 in the closed state.

Then, when the game ball B enters the second start opening guide shelf 2423, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start opening door 2411 is When the game ball B is in the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are discharged from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 130 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B that entered the second starting port guide shelf 2423 and was not accepted by the second starting port 2004 was released to the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 side and rolled on the closed large winning opening door 2413. Later, it is discharged into the game area 5a and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second start port guide shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is open, the second start port guide is provided. The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning opening 2005.

From the above, since the game ball B circulating through the first distribution passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing through the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B. The result of the ordinary lottery is rarely drawn, and the game ball B is not accepted so much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B circulating in the second distribution passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability, the second starting port 2004 is opened by the passage of the gate portion 2003 of the game ball B (normal lottery result). There is a high possibility that a "normal hit") will be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted at the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, the player will perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second distribution passage 2522, so that the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2511. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the second distribution passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the driving operation of the game ball B so that the player is less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player with the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit". A lottery of the special lottery result that generates ") is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "15R jackpot A", "15R jackpot B", and the like. ..

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 130. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by accepting the game ball B in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or a predetermined time to the big winning opening 2005. An opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball B is in an unacceptable closed state when any of the conditions of accepting the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied. Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "15R jackpot", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the "big hit", when the big winning opening 2005 is open due to the big hit game state, the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second entrance 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, and the big hit game is played. After the end of the state, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations, and a time saving that changes the display time of a production image that suggests a special lottery result. It maintains the state of.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

As described above, when the large winning opening 2005 is opened due to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second distribution passage When the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of 2522 is performed, the driving operation must be finely adjusted, so some players may feel impatient or frustrated by the arrival of the chance. This may reduce the interest in the game. However, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right to circulate the first distribution passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the first passage. (2) Since the game ball B can be distributed to the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 side (large winning opening 2005 side) via the starting port guiding shelf 2423, it is easy without making delicate adjustments to the driving operation. The game ball B can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005 by the driving operation, and the player can enjoy the game in the advantageous game state, and the driving operation of the game ball B is sharp according to the game state. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R jackpot game A, 15R jackpot game B, etc.) is generated according to the special lottery result.

The time for suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2450 are set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the unit 161 is operated. In the player participation type production, the pressing operation unit 161 can be raised to stand out by the first elevating drive motor 180a and the second elevating drive motor 182, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 160. be able to.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are provided. , And the back third production unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission production, movable production, etc., and the player can be entertained by various productions, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the back first of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3100, the back second effect unit 3200, the back third effect unit 3300, etc. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 61 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 62, and FIG. 64 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display process will be described.

[8-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number used to determine whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400 when a big hit game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used for determining the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed by the symbol display, and a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol hit is determined. The initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for normal use, and the normal symbol for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU when it is operated when the power is turned on or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information as numerical values and calculating the total is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. The ID code is taken out from, and the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code is executed, and this derived fixed value is executed. Is set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code and a two-step security measure by the execution.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. Cannot generate a gaming state.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and is stored in the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value of 1 when deleting various information and a value of 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is set by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turning it ON. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is turned on. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18, the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and / or the signal of the setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change or confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when is turned ON, and the setting change or confirmation of the setting value. The value is set to 1 when the display is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value or the confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 boots in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. (Step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a value 1. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. , It is determined that various information will be deleted in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not a value 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0. In addition, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU assumes that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the value is present, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

Following step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU has the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG having a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG not having a value of 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG). When it is determined that the value is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the value 0), the checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S29, in the main control MPU, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as the backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After turning it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. Processing at the time of input is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above, and described above. In the determination of step S18, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. In step S20A described above, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG. Therefore, in the determination of step S25 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and Assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the process of step S38 described later is followed by the setting change process of step S37 described later. In the above, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be advanced by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (hereinafter, "first RAM error canceling method"). To be described).

As a method different from this first RAM error clearing method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In step S18 described above, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is set by the setting key ON signal. In step S20B described above, it is determined that the key is not turned on, and the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG. Therefore, in the determination of step S26 described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. Moreover, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but various information is input in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. By determining that the game is to be erased and clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed. (Hereinafter, it will be described as "second RAM error canceling method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that the content stored in is abnormal (or unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process has been normally completed, the main control MPU has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset power" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU itself is reset, and then the main control MPU itself is restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK-is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1311. Each time, the set value was changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a was changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. When it is determined that various information will be deleted in the same way as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the specified area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. And clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is a count of the number of balls of the game ball collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It consists of an out-ball counting area where the results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the ball of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number is stored.

The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, in the main control MPU, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f indicates RAM clear, and when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or on the main control side. When the power off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a fixed random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally (hereinafter, "" It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer setting value is set, the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU (by the time when the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value) ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the startup of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values in one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is created as the transmission information by creating the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. be. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signal output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on processing again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not executed because the main control side power off processing is not executed, so the previous time. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the power cutoff process on the main control side when the power is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S29 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. When this is done, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area are completely erased (cleared), and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL is performed. -When the FLG is a value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. Similarly, when it is determined to erase various information, in the process of step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area are completely erased (cleared). In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is set. The main control MPU always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM even if the setting change that can be changed is not performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process). This means that when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of a hit state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall should use the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of. Further, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change processing is performed, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that can check the current setting value that is set in addition to changing the setting value, so a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall Only possession is permitted and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is not decided to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall deletes (clears) the game backup information. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f when it is necessary to perform the game backup information, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. ing.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, a problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, a problem in the case where the process after the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed and the process after step S26 will be performed will be described.

As described above, the photoelectric terminal MC2, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall is island. It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment). 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S29. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no intention display by the game hall clerk staff member such as RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game can be obtained by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control board performs the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff process can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power recovery, and the main control is performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above steps, the game cannot be advanced.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt enable is enabled in step S52. By blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process that is set and described later, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter (such as information) from being updated. When the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By configuring it in two parts, a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) is not changed at all). , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built-in as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, the problem. , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of turning on the power of the main control return destination command at the time of turning on the power is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. It will shift from the closed state to the open state by the member.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is used as the main control board. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. A large winning opening 1 closure display command is issued from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the transition from the present state to the closed state (that is, the closing start between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing that the state is changed to the above state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen telling the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open). When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys to the player the message "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits on the front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen telling that the drive of the start port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is open (for example, "the movable piece is open." The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port" to the player in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct the player who is seated in the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, it is performed in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except the specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information to indicate that when clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which of the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of the information shown and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the operator of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And a series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[8-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 62 and 63.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 64 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, and a second starting opening sensor 2402. Detection signal, detection signal from the winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the out opening sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear) Signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting switching button 1311b, prize ball transmitted by prize ball control processing described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command, is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2101, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is stored from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing), this switch input processing is started. First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, Detection signal from the winning port sensor 2403, detection signal from the out port sensor 3032, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, door The detection signal from the frame opening switch 4a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button 1311b, and the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process described later are paid out. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the board 633 has been normally received.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is performed is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the winning random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count counting process (step S107). In this ball count processing, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a detection signal from the out port sensor 3032 is input based on this input information to the game area 5a which is partitioned on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the provided out port 1008, the value 1 is added to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008. Perform an operation (increment). The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time as storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command to notify when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. Then, it is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value by 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command is not input within the specified time, a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process in step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. , The second starting port 2004, and various winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") are paid as prize balls based on the game balls entered. It counts the number of game balls to be released, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the above-mentioned main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to convey that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, even though the second start door 2411 is not in the open state, the second start door 2004 has entered the game ball B, or the big prize door 2413 is not in the open state. Check if there is any abnormal condition related to the prize ball, such as the entry of the game ball B into the large prize opening 2005. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By outputting a security signal to the main control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the ability of a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall to detect an abnormal state related to a prize ball at an early stage. The security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred includes the security signal output when it is determined that the magnet goto described later is being performed, and the vibration described later. It is the same signal as the security signal that is output when it is determined that a goto is being performed. Further, the security signal is output by the main control MPU to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. However, after the main control MPU sends a command instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU uses the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633. A security signal may be output to the hall computer installed in the.

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, the fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto””. It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that magnet goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is an initial value when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that magnet goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the magnet goto is performed in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly used. By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraud due to vibration (hereinafter referred to as “vibration goto”) is described. ) Is performed, and the value of the vibration goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this vibration goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that vibration goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is an initial value when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as. When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a vibration goto notification command classified as a notification display indicating that vibration goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibration goto is performed in the fraud detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly used. By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to detect the vibrating goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a large winning opening abnormality winning is generated (when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified into a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. ..

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the magnet goto and / or the vibration goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the fraud detection, while the magnet goto and the vibration goto are set. When not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as undetected fraud. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of the abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set to the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. In addition, the logic of the launch permission signal is set by the hardware including the main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the reverse of the launch permission logic as the initial value (default). Although it is configured, it is set to the launch permission logic after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored).

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type. Judgment (determines the hit type) whether or not it matches any of the hit type judgment values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 2101, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Function display unit 1400 that sets the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp is lit, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. Set the output of the lighting signal to the status display of, and store it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with a 0th to 3rd section (4 sections), and a normal winning opening is provided in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning slot The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information in the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, respectively. It is shifted and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information storage is the first. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage will be empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is used as a reserved ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to light the hold display, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined fluctuation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while being taken out normally. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of winning the normal lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to doing, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission signal set in the launch permission logic or the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. A display signal can be output to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or stored in a set value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display Various commands classified into commands, test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball entered into the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Numerical information output command, etc.), various commands classified into specific history (for example, ball collection command to notify every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, set value is set. A setting change command that tells that the change has been made, an error display command that tells that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a specific area of the main control built-in RAM The setting value confirmation display command, etc. that tells to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure. The main-circle serial transmission port built into the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circle serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter are used. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main peripheral serial data in that order. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, then to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first of all the various information, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball recovery command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the received ball. For each collection command, the number of balls of the game ball collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008). Information that associates the total number of game balls) with the updated date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) is used. The ball collection information associated with the total number of balls) and the updated date and time is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on when the game hall was opened, the peripheral control MPU on the peripheral control board 1510 started operating the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the day, and the ball recovery information is stored and held as the ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as the ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 62 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. A command to return to the main control when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 62 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 63, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on is performed. , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It sends, then sends to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then outputs the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. Judgment counter Sends to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 62.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 65 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is a checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 62. It is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is stored in the main control MPU in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 62. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the processing for power off on the main control side has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to the value 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU has set values 1 to 6 in which the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control When the MPU determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to light the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, while the setting switching button when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

In the determination of step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. (Step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position to turn off the switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, while when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is OFF. Judge that it has not been operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the processing of steps S218 and S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the setting key is turned off. When it is determined that the setting is not performed, the determination is returned to step S216 again, and when the setting switching button 1311b is operated until the setting key is turned OFF, the setting value is added and updated by 1 each time the operation is performed. It is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and if the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned off, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main setting value. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the control built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the updated setting value is updated with respect to the setting value set in, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the area dedicated to the setting value in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU stops the output of the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is hidden (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the value 0 in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change and confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the present time), and the setting change and confirmation display of the setting value can be performed. The value is set to 1 when permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change or confirmation display of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value or display the confirmation after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is normal, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 63, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 64. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. Upon receiving the setting change command, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the set value history information (information in which the set value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the main control MPU enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the process at the time of turning on the power on the main control side shown in FIG. 62.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installed value as shown in FIG. 66 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 81. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S350 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is within the normal range from the set value 1 to the set value 6, and when it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the range is normal, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and outputs the setting display to the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S354).

On the other hand, in the determination of step S352, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S356), and the main control MPU enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. A detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

Following step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position), and then turning it off to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. It is performed based on the OFF signal from 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. If not, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S358, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination of step S358 and repeats the determination of step S358 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S358, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned off, the lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S360).

Following step S360, the main control MPU sets the value 0 in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S361). As described above, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change and confirmation display of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the present time), and the setting change and confirmation display of the setting value can be performed. The value is set to 1 when permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change or confirmation display of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value or display the confirmation after that.

Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S362), then creates a setting value confirmation display command to set transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 63, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is FIG. 64. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S362, the transmission information (set value confirmation display command) set in step S364 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main peripheral serial data, but this is before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is set in step S50 in the process at the time of power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is because, with priority, the peripheral control board 1510 is notified by the set value confirmation display command that the confirmation of the set value has been completed. The setting value confirmation display command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is the routine, has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed. ) Is a command to convey.

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 62, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 62 (FIG. 65). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 62, and the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 62 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 66). It is a process performed in.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 67 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. While it is possible to tell that the launch is permitted, if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to convey that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 62 and the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 62. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 65) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 62 (specifically, FIG. 66). When started as the process performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 63, the main control MPU can set the interrupt enable setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 64 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the emission permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, it has a reset function at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 62, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 62. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 65) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIG. 62 (specifically, the process performed in step S28). When started as a process performed in step S356 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 66, the main control MPU recovers power in step S400 after the error display process, which is the present routine, is started. Also, in order to surely prevent the game ball B from being fired, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permitted logic), and the reset function is performed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed to the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 65, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 66, and FIG. 63. The process is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the periphery of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S366 in the control board transmission command transmission process and the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 66, and the peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is the same process as the command transmission process. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 62, and is performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 62 (FIG. 65). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 66) and the process performed in step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data for the peripheral control board. It is being sent to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it stores and holds error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Update.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, the white background image "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to controlling the display of text message images, the volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 to announce "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." It is controlled to flow from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) by forcibly setting the maximum volume without depending on the above. The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the peripheral control MPU on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM error is notified. Is the highest priority.

[9. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, and FIG. 70 is a payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 71 is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, while it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

In the determination of step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout information (such as the PRDY signal output setting information), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the power cutoff process of the control unit is normally completed, and to 0 when the power cutoff process of the payout control unit is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase the payout information, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is. When it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for timing 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). The prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually uses the counter for determining the number of prize balls information. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is shown. The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and the BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal and CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc., as input information. Stored in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball gummy determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball gummy state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591. Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that do not match due to the mismatch with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter that is set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gadget judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure while the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery, even if the momentary power failure or stop occurs. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the mismatch counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logic state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, it is determined from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out of ball check process by using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the time counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

Whether or not the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls this time. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and the display data is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, set the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other variable processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). By this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, the writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[9-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process shown in FIGS. 68 to 70.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 71 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 76. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 74 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 72. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 72 under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control MPU performs initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initially initialized in an extremely short time. Can be transformed into. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the effect that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed with this as an opportunity. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1006 again to determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

In the determination of step S1006, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the peripheral control MPU first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the effects operation unit monitoring processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to be the set brightness specified value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the luminance specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value constituting the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st luminance which is the maximum luminance from the 1st luminance designated value. It is possible to set one brightness specified value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is counteracted. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be low along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In this embodiment, a case where the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness are obtained. By displaying a rod-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated with light. be. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value in the other palette values. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the normal pallet value with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated with direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are directly irradiated as light, the palette is applied to a specific decorative board (LED that is dazzling to the player) that is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. The state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light can be visually recognized as the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. With respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) determines the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at which the brightness is the next highest after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (turning off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually determines the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness is more effective), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one luminance specified value is set up to the luminance specified value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark). It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship).

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control MPU ( The drawing data for one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later will occur. From various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music or sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the peripheral control MPU and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on various analyzed commands. Then) set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively, are set. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a variable pattern command for instructing the start of a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of a special symbol, It analyzes whether it is a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start hold changes, and a command that displays 1 count of the big prize opening that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005. Recognize if there is.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to the synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to the normal electric function effect, various commands classified as the notification display, various commands classified as the status display, various commands classified as related to the test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on a received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. Read from (extract) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 (for one screen). The drawing data for one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is selected. Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to be used according to the channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Is specified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, from the output channel set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the door. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become like.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value for the effect sound, and the volume adjustment switch is rotated for the notification sound. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds have passed since the change pattern command was received until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate except for (until the elapse of seconds). It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is used. , The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is set to mute. The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track with the built-in notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined. , The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound. (Set to the volume value), the sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or pachinko. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of 4, this muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. It starts to flow again from the point where it progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the peripheral control MPU is the peripheral control MPU by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem has occurred or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input to the peripheral control MPU from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU with a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed with this as an opportunity. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU will be described. do. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 73 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 72 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is used as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set to the value 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 72. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 72. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 72. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V-blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, has a value of 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 72 is performed. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 72. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 72 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 74 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 72, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. Occasionally, just exit this routine. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the peripheral control MPU adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 72. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. According to the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, the electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electric drive sources provided in various production units provided in the game board 5) become available. , Electrical drive source Driven according to schedule data.

Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided in the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The movable position is grasped by performing or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas and are set to different areas, and are set to SDRAM. The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the DRAM and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 72, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU uses this as an opportunity to transmit the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU. Information is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 75 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the acquisition period, 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). ). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the peripheral control MPU is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, a status in which the status is the first byte of the main circuit serial data, and the mode is still the second byte of the main circuit serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the peripheral control MPU is a mode in which the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). .. In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge is performed to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match. When this is done, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216). End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the peripheral control MPU selects 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the receivable period has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and step S1212. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step 1 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 76, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. Determination (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the peripheral control MPU ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input. Occasionally, this routine is terminated as it is, but when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, the peripheral control MPU performs power saving processing when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started. Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided in the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing it, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the command being transmitted can be received by the peripheral control MPU for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and backed up.

Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the peripheral control MPU performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. judge. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the peripheral control MPU cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT, and the peripheral control While the MPU is reset, when it is determined in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the peripheral control MPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 72 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure state due to the WDT clear processing being executed in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 77, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 2101. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute a first start port passage process such as storing in a special symbol hold storage area (step S2032). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S2035), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S2039) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot A". 15R A distribution piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit game state A and distributes the game ball B accepted in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. Drive control is performed, and a process of setting the game ball B to the effective state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second entrance 2008 is executed. Further, when the mode suggesting "15R jackpot B", the opening and closing control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed according to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, and the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is the first entrance. The distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to either 2007 or the second reception 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process of setting the game ball B to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception 2008 is executed.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the game ball B has an "effective state" as a state when the game ball B is received in the second entrance 2008. Here, the "valid state" is high after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the second reception 2008 in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception 2008. It is a state that is allowed (enabled) to be controlled to a stochastic state. Therefore, by accepting the game ball B at the second entrance 2008 in the "valid state", the game ball B is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B has an "invalid state" different from the "valid state" as a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008. Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted in the second reception 2008 in principle, such as in the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first reception 2007. (Ii) Even if the game ball B is accepted at the reception entrance 2008, it is not allowed (invalidated) to control the game ball B to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the "invalid state" makes it possible to notify the hall management side of information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality when the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is set as a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008. In this embodiment, the game ball B is set to the "valid state" in a predetermined round (15th round) that enables the game ball B to be distributed to the second entrance 2008, and the game is played in the second entrance 2008. Whenever the ball B is accepted, it is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, although the "invalid state" is set for a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game ball B is not distributed to the second entrance 2008, it may be set to the "valid state". In this way, even if the "valid state" is set in all rounds during the jackpot game state, the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 in principle in the 1st to 14th rounds, so 1 to 1 to As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set in the "valid state".

Further, in the big hit control process (step S2041), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second entrance 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds in which the jackpot 2005 is opened. If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set because it is controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Although it is set, if the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Since it does not, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop processing or the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. The high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) that controls the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Set at the end of the based jackpot game state. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 126 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is a time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled to the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , The counter value is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0", FIG. 126 described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in (1) or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S2036), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S2037), and the second special symbol is stored in the reserved storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S2038). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S2032).

If it is determined in the process of step S2031 that the first start port sensor 2101 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 78. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S2042). In the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to S2043 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S2045 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2044, each random number acquired in step S2041 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S2041. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S2045), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S2043 to S2045, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored items, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of first reserved stored items is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it has a pre-determination table (not shown) and a random number acquired in step S2041, specifically, a first special random number, a first symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation. Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S2061).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the type of game effect to be played (such as the type of game effect to be played), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first hold storage number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S2062).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600. Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize, such as whether to execute the reach effect as the game effect to be performed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. Is stored and is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received. The determination information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-judgment information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the hold for starting the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-judgment information.

At the time when the fluctuation display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the fluctuation display control is maintained even though the fluctuation display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S2034).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S2033, it is shown in FIG. 80. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is determined to be "4" (step S2052). In the process of step S2052, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2053 to the following steps S2053 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2054, each random number acquired in step S2051 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2052, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S2053 to S2054, the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is second-held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second number of reserved storages is set in the above storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S2037). The first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S2080)
2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which a lottery process or the like is performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S2083) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S2084) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S2080) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S2080).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 82, first steps S2101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S2102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted by the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). become.

Then, as the process of step S2105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081) (step S2106), this process is terminated.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S2105).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S2111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 84 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S2112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S2111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 84 (A) is selected (step S2113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 84 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at the time of low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, when the set value is 1, 1/319, when the set value is 2, 1/309, when the set value is 3, 1/299, and when the set value is 4. 1/289, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6, which matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the jackpot. The first special random numbers other than the above are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the first special random numbers are out of the above. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the first is in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number. Similar to the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with special random numbers, 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3. The second special random number was won with a jackpot probability of 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the second special random number is the same as the deviation determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are out of the above.

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 1 / 31.9 when the set value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the set value is 2, and 1 / 29.9 when the set value is 3. The first special random number (at low probability) with a jackpot probability of 1 / 28.9 when the set value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the set value is 6. (Includes the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot judgment table) matches the jackpot judgment value, and the other first special random numbers match the loss judgment value. Special random numbers are associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is low-probability time (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state)) for each set value. And the time saving state (low probability time saving state)) is increased to 10 times. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the first is in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number. Similar to the high-probability jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with special random numbers, 1 / 31.9 when the setting value is 1, 1 / 30.9 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value 3 1 / 29.9 when the set value is 4, 1 / 28.9 when the set value is 4, 1 / 27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1 / 26.9 when the set value is 6. The second special random number (including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of low probability) matches the jackpot judgment value with probability, and the other second special random numbers are missed. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the determination value.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S2116), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first special read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process are performed. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random number, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S2118), a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reach is set and processing is performed. It ends (step S2119).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 85, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S2105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 (B). (Step S2122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S2121, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S2124).

As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) is stored in the symbol determination table in a form associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. In the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the big hit game state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening where the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. 5 seconds) and open for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easily). For example, 20 seconds). If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, it is special after the end of the big hit game state. While the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, the game ball B is placed at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. If it is not accepted, the 15R jackpot A that controls the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) to a low probability time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state.
2.15R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the big hit game state B, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening where the game ball B is difficult to enter. For example, 0. It is set to the effective state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state) at the time of 5 seconds), and is effective in the 15th round. If the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the state, it is high until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state. While controlling to the probability time reduction state, if the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the special symbols (first special symbol and first special symbol and first) after the end of the jackpot game state. (2) One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B, which controls the variable display of the special symbol) to a low probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, is determined.

In the 15R big hit game state A of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, and the predetermined time (4.5 seconds) is set as the interval time in the round. It is set to open the big prize opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds) after the lapse of seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. Then, when the long-time opening (20 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the distribution pieces 2415 is started, and the second inlet 2008 is started during the operation period of the distribution pieces 2415. The game ball B is set to be acceptable. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). ) Is set.

On the other hand, in the 15R big hit game state B of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is set to open for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round. In addition, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short-time opening (0.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 2005 is started, the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the distribution piece 2415 is started. However, the game ball B is set to be acceptable at the second reception port 2008 during the operation period of the distribution piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round, an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). ) Is set.

As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are in the valid state in the 15th round (the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008, so that the high probability state is reached after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Although it is set to the state to be controlled), in the 15R big hit game state A, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the big winning opening 2005 is opened for the second time in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and since the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period when the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds), the large winning opening 2005 is used. It is extremely easy for the accepted game ball B to be distributed (accepted) to the second entrance 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so that the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The probability of doing so is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit game state B, since the big winning opening 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and further. Since the distribution piece 2415 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period when the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to distribute (accept) to the entrance 2008. In this way, in the 15R jackpot game state B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so that the high probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The probability of doing so is also extremely low.

As for the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415, the distribution piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the distribution piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10). It has a single motion schedule set to (seconds), and the motion of such a distribution piece 2415 when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. I try to start the schedule. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 as a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 is not increased as much as possible.

In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in each round of the 1st to 14th rounds. Is set to. Further, as the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the distribution piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is not operated at the second reception 2008 but at the first reception 2007 during that period. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule for the second entrance 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008, and after the end of the big hit game state). It is set to a state that will not be controlled to a high probability state). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the game ball B is distributed to the second entrance 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. It does not play a game of whether or not it is (accepted), but simply plays a game of whether or not the game ball B is accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (15 rounds) which is relatively advantageous to the player. Distribution of 50 judgment values to the jackpot (big hit) where the probability that the game ball B is accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state by the eye and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is high). Is set, but 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends. Distribution of 50 determination values is set for a jackpot with a low probability of controlling to a high probability state later). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 65 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B. On the other hand, 35 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, since either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined, what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit? Can be noticed. Further, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed, but the second special. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, the 15R big hit game A is decided with a higher probability than at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, so it is important to pay attention to how much prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of consecutive villas. can. Therefore, the game is not monotonous because the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive villas.

Further, when the type of the jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S2125, any of these lottery results (type of jackpot, missed reach, or missed) is instructed (the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is specified). A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S2126, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082). The peripheral control MPU starts variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. The display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU is 15R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the jackpot A is specified, it is determined to be the 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, it is determined to be the 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) and varies. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is variable-stopped by either the 15R jackpot A symbol or the 15R jackpot B symbol, it can be determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that it is a jackpot. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it is not possible to discriminate between the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the reach loss is specified from the received determination result notification command, the peripheral control MPU is accompanied by a reach. (Combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same), and if the deviation is specified, the missing symbol without reach (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same). Is not the same), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S2082).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 86. If so (step S2141), the type of jackpot determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step). S2142), if the reach flag is set (step S2143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S2144), and both the jackpot flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S2145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S2146), and the determination variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S2147). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S2148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S2083) as the process of step S2149. This process ends when the update is made.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of off, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of shortening is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), but not. The variation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a form that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds at the time reduction is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). That is, the above-mentioned special pattern is selected so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected at the non-time reduction. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S2083).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 87, first steps S2171. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process for the variation pattern (step S2082) is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of this step S2173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 88, first steps S2181. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuations of the time reduction state is set is "0". (Step S2183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S2184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S2185). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). If it is determined in the process of step S2183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S2185 that the time reduction counter is not "0". At that point, the process proceeds to step S2187.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S2187), a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state is set (step S2189), and the jackpot game state is started (big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (the period for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the counter value of the time saving count counter is set. If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process is performed. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S2192).

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S2039).

In step S2189, the waiting time until the start of the big hit game state is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. 89 shows. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and is in an effective state in the 15th round (a big hit game state by receiving the game ball B in the second entrance 2008). The large winning opening opening / closing process (step S2402) set to the high probability state after the end of the game, and the game ball B accepted in the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round are set to the second entrance 2008. The distribution piece 2415 is driven and controlled so that it can be distributed, and the opening / closing of the second entrance is monitored to monitor whether or not the game ball B is accepted by the second entrance 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. The process (step S2403) and the process (step S2403) are executed in order.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned large winning opening opening / closing process (step S2402).

Now, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the open state in the process of step S2411, as shown in FIG. 90, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time and 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed from the open state of the large winning opening 2005 (step S2412), or according to the operation schedule of When the game ball B wins the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine) in the open winning opening 2005 (step S2413), the open winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the big winning opening 2005 in the closed state (step S2415), the type of big hit and the current number of rounds are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. The jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

Further, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the closed state in the process of step S2411, as shown in FIG. 90, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When it is time to open the big winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule of (step S2417), when it is determined that a new round is started by controlling the big winning opening 2005 to the open state. (Step S2418) sets a jackpot round start command according to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened. If it is the start time (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S2420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed state of the large winning opening 2005 or the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. In addition, when it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the above-mentioned big winning opening 2005 to the open state (second opening in the same round, etc.) (step S2418), or the valid state flag. If it is determined that it is not the timing to set (step S2420), the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S2422), and step S2428 is performed. Move to. Thereby, the effect according to the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

It should be noted that the valid state flag is set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). It is a flag to indicate. In the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005 in the second entrance opening / closing process (step S2403) described later is used as the first entrance 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 to be distributed to any of the second inlets 2008, the game ball B can be accepted by the second acceptor 2008 and is set to the effective state.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S2428 that the game ball B has been accepted in the large winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 90, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a peripheral control board. A large winning opening ball entry command is set as a command to be transmitted to 1510 (step S2429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the big winning opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B to the big winning opening 2005 is produced by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S2417 that it is not the timing to open the large winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 90, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large. When the total number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the jackpot executing flag is reset (step S2424). Then, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time reduction flag is set, and the counter value of the time reduction count counter is set. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S2427). If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, the time reduction flag is set, and the time reduction counter value is set to the time reduction state. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S2427). In this way, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is set (the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. And the time saving flag is set to control the time saving state with high probability, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round). If it is determined that the time is reduced, only the time saving flag is set and the time saving state is controlled with a low probability.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second entrance opening / closing process (step S2403).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in an open state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), FIG. 91. As shown in the above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when the second inlet 2008 is open) from the open state of the second inlet 2008 according to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415. , 0.2 seconds when the game is opened for a short time) (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is completed by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to be closed (step). S2433), the open second receiving port 2008 is controlled to be closed (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distribution piece 2415) (step S2434).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S2431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 91, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the distribution piece. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second inlet 2008 (step S2435), the closed second inlet 2008 is controlled to be open (step S2436).

Next, in the process of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B has been accepted by the second entrance 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 91, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined. Determines whether or not the game ball B has been accepted by the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round in the setting of the valid state flag (step S2438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been accepted at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), the second receiving is received during the valid state in the 15th round. When the second inlet / outlet passage flag indicating that the game ball B has been accepted is not set at the entrance 2008 (step S2439), the second inlet / outlet passage flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. This process ends when the second entrance passage command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441). As described above, unless the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second entrance passage flag is not set and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. Is not set, so it is not controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, when the second inlet / exit passage command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second inlet / outlet 2008 is produced by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state in the process of step S2801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 92, the above As the process of step S2802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S2803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S2805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S2806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the second starting door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S2807) for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S2802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state in the process of step S2801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 93. As the process of step S2811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". (Step S2812). If it is determined in the process of step S2812 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 are performed in order to put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2813, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number acquired in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. ..

However, in the process of step S2812, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S2813 to S2814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S2803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 94, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing of step S2821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S2822, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is normal. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers, variable random numbers in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (first) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S2826), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S2825), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step). S2827), the selected normal figure hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is the time saving time (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time saving time hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving time (low probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game, and the second start door 2411 rotates to the second start 2004. It controls the acceptance of the game ball B of.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with ordinary random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of ordinary random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball B is not won in the normal drawing, so that the second starting door 2411 rotates to the second position. (Ii) It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S2829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S2830), the normal symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S2831), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S2822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S2832). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2804) (step S2833), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extreme. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled by an opening / closing pattern in which the second starting port 2004 is closed in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is much easier to win the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim at the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002. B can be awarded. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always a hit, and the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Also, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B cannot be won by the second starting port 2004, so that the first starting port 2002 The game ball B must be launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B wins the prize. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is the obstacle nails. By abutting on N, various movements are given to the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not always won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to win the game ball B more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. The game ball B must be launched (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the ball B wins a prize. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is opened. The passing game ball B is designed to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time saving state is controlled. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the game ball B, the game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit when passing through the gate portion 2003, and the variation display of the normal symbol is performed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2004, and further to the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins a prize, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state, so that the time is short. The variable display control of the special symbol (holding of the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, and the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to control the game state to a big hit and expect to acquire many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is performed. Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[12. Behavior of pachinko machines when the power is turned on]
In the present embodiment, as the functions of the pachinko machine 1, a function for changing the setting of the set value and a function for confirming and displaying the set value are installed. Specifically, the setting change of the set value can be changed by executing the setting change process of step S37 described above, and the confirmation display of the set value can be displayed by executing the setting value confirmation display process of step S28 described above. Allows it to be done. When changing the setting of such a set value, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In order to display the confirmation, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f in addition to operating the power switch 630a when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 95 (B) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting of the set value is changed at times, and FIG. 95 (C) shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 62. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs the power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

At the time of timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). Then, following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and / or the signal of the setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination results are operated. Information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f while pressing the pachinko machine. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the main control MPU performs the wait time standby process following step S20A or step S20B (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process of the above is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

At the time of the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24), and the power failure warning signal is displayed. When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is set. If it is satisfied, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on, and the determination results are operated. The information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, but the operation information is stored until the timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, arrives. It is supposed to be maintained. Then, at the time of the timing ty, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform the setting change process (step S37), or perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) based on the storage of the operation information. It is decided whether to perform S28).

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Needs to be operated, while the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned on. In this way, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of the timing tx, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a If is not turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 0 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

When initializing the RAM with the built-in main control, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty, the RAM clear switch 1310f of the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be operated. The pressing operation unit does not need to be operated. That is, after the operation information is stored in the timing tx, the operation information stored in the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, so that the RAM is cleared even before the timing ty arrives. It is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the switch 1310f is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the time of timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the time of timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value 0 between the timing ty and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the setting of the set value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f operates at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. It is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. In this way, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of the timing tx, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a When is ON-operated, a value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty, the setting change process (step S37) is to be performed. .. Further, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

When changing the setting of the set value, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be operated and the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at the time of timing tx. However, at the time of timing ty, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be operated, and similarly, the setting key switch 1311a does not need to be turned ON. That is, after the operation information is stored in the timing tx, the operation information stored in the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives, so that the RAM is cleared even before the timing ty arrives. It is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the switch 1310f is operated to the state in which it is not operated. Similarly, the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is changed to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is possible to do. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state before the timing ty arrives, after the setting change process (step S37) is started at the timing ty, the setting change process is started. It is necessary to switch from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off again, and from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. This is because, in the determination of step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is because the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the OFF operation is performed.

Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the time of timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the time of timing ty. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). Anything that does. Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the time of timing tx, and the setting key is set at the time of timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. The ON flag CS-FLG has been reset to a value of 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has been initialized from the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37) from the timing ty. Anything that resets to the value 0 may be used until the value is set to 0.

As shown in FIG. 95 (C), when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. On the other hand, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. When is ON-operated, a value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty, it is determined to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. I'm supposed to do it. Further, when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty and then the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

When confirming the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the time of timing tx, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the time of timing ty. There is no need. That is, after the operation information is stored in the timing tx, the operation information stored in the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Therefore, even before the timing ty arrives, the setting key is used. It is possible to change from the state in which the switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the switch 1311a is turned off. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state before the timing ty arrives, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty. Later, it is necessary to change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and then from the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. This is because, in the determination of step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. In this determination, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. This is because the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the OFF operation is performed from the state of being on.

Further, in this example, at the time of timing tx, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at the time of timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, the value 1 is set. The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set between the timing ty and the timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets to a value of 0 will do.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 95 (B) and 95 (C), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is assumed that the situation is continuing. In this respect, the main body frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, and the main body frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. In the closed situation, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from setting the value 1 (to set the value 0) as the second operation information. There is. This can be illegally changed or illegally set under the condition that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the business hours of the game hall (under the situation where the manager of the game hall is difficult to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. It does not matter, and the main body frame 4 has never been opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is used between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the RAM is cleared. It is possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG and prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming infeasible. Then, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to at least prevent the game start itself from being hindered.

In the present embodiment, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag as the second operation information at the time of the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. The values of CS-FLG are set, and their operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, after the operation information is stored in the timing tx, the operation information stored in the timing ty is maintained until the timing ty arrives, and at the time of the timing ty, the operation information is stored in the storage of the operation information. Based on this, it is determined whether to perform the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the setting change process (step S37), or the set value confirmation display process (step S28), and the determined process. I try to do. That is, even if the operation mode of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a are changed between the time when the operation information is stored in the timing tx and the time when the timing ty arrives, the operation mode is changed. The operation information stored in the timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the hall administrator mistakenly sets the operation mode of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a. Even if it is changed, by keeping the operation information stored in the timing tx unchanged, it is not necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 again, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Later, the process intended by the hall administrator (any of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the setting change process (step S37), and the set value confirmation display process (step S28)) can be promptly executed. ..

Further, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f without operating the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a. In addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a when changing the setting of the set value. In addition to operating the power switch 630a, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f. Then, at the time of the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is used as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is used as the second operation information. The value of is set, and those operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Is intended to execute (one of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the setting change processing (step S37), and the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)). For example, when the operation unit is provided corresponding to each of the case of initializing the main control built-in RAM, changing the setting of the set value, and displaying the confirmation of the set value, the power switch 630a and others It is necessary to provide three operation units, but by different processing executed after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on the combination of operation information, the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch are used in addition to the power switch 630a. The two operation units of 1311a may be provided, and the number of parts required for the operation unit can be saved.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. 95 (B) and 95 (C), the period from timing tx to timing ty is set. As the second operation information, the set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held, and it does not matter whether the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty, the main body frame 4 can be repeatedly opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is set with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set by the timing tx is reset, and at the time of the timing ty, the setting change process (step S37) and the set value confirmation display process. At the time of timing ty, the setting change process (step S37) is performed without performing (step S28) or resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx. Or may not be determined to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28). That is, even if the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. May be restricted so that the setting of the setting value cannot be changed or the confirmation display of the setting value cannot be performed. According to this, as described above, the setting is illegally changed under the condition that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the business hours of the game hall (under the situation where the manager of the game hall is difficult to notice). It is possible to prevent the settings from being checked illegally.

Further, in this example, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information on condition that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated even temporarily in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. Although the value 1 is set, it may be a condition that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the RAM clear switch 1310f is held down. Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 as the second operation information, provided that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON even temporarily. However, it may be a condition that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the RAM clear switch 1310f or the setting key switch 1311a when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the hall manager does not intend to execute the process. Can be prevented.

Further, as will be described in detail later, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 3003 and the fraudulent monitoring using the vibration sensor 2005 are restricted. .. That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, the hall administrator may change the RAM clear switch 1310f from the operated state to the non-operated state, or change the setting key switch 1311a from the ON operation state to the OFF state. It is possible to put it in an operated state, but it is restricted so that fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 3003 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 2005 are not performed. As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or vibrates when operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as a fraudulent act. It can be prevented and the obstruction of regular work can be suppressed.

[12-1. Modification example of the behavior of pachinko machines when the power is turned on]
In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is determined in each of the cases of initializing the main control built-in RAM, changing the setting of the set value, and displaying the confirmation of the set value. The timing of determination and the timing of determining whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on are the same, but whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. The timing for determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f may be determined may be different from the timing for determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. An example of modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. Further, FIG. 97 (A) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 97 (B) is a pachinko machine. FIG. 97 (C) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the machine 1 is turned on. FIG. 97 (C) shows a confirmation display of the set value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of performing.

As shown in FIG. 97, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 96. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs the power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (ms). ) Is set.

At the time of timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, at the time of the timing tx, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. Since the period from timing t3 to timing tx is extremely short, a person who presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f while pressing the pachinko machine. It is necessary to turn on the power of 1.

After the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the main control MPU performs the wait time waiting process following step S16A or step S16B (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process of the above is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received.

At the time of timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24), and the power failure warning signal is displayed. When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch is determined by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1311a is ON, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and / or the signal of the setting key ON. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). That is, at the time of timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. is doing. As described above, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time wait process, whereas the time point of the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time wait process. The second operation information is stored in. Since at least 10 seconds (s), which is the waiting time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time waiting process (step S22), is set as the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty1, the setting key switch 1311a The person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a may turn on the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, the main operation is performed. The setting key switch 1311a may be turned on until the timing ty1 for the control MPU to complete the wait time standby process arrives.

At the time of timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored in timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU uses the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. -It is determined which combination the FLG value is (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is set. If it is satisfied, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at the time of timing tx, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. After that, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, arrives. On the other hand, at the time of timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, arrives thereafter. Then, at the time of timing ty2, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform the setting change process (step S37), or perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) based on the storage of those operation information. It is decided whether to perform step S28).

As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Must be operated. In this way, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of the timing tx, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation thereof. Information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at the time of timing ty1, the value 0 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is mainly used. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38). Step S38) is to be performed.

When initializing the RAM with built-in main control, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty1 or timing ty2, the RAM is cleared. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit of the switch 1310f is operated. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, so that the first operation information is maintained before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

Further, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the time of timing ty1, but at the time of timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is set. It may be turned on. That is, after the second operation information is stored in the timing ty1, the second operation information stored in the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the time of timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the time of timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value 0 between the timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 97 (B), when the setting of the set value is changed, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Must have been. In this way, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of the timing tx, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation thereof. Information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the time of the timing ty1 in which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the time of timing ty1, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is mainly used. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the setting change process (step S37) is to be performed. .. Further, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

When changing the setting of the set value, it is necessary that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of timing tx, but at the time of timing ty1 or timing ty2, the RAM clear switch 1310f is required. It is not necessary that the pressing operation unit of is operated. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, so that the first operation information is maintained before the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to change from the state in which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

Further, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the time of timing ty1, but at the time of timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored in the timing ty1, the second operation information stored in the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information at the time of timing tx, and the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to the value 0 at the time of timing ty2. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value 0 between the timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). Further, in this example, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the time of timing ty1, and the setting key is set at the time of timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed. The ON flag CS-FLG has been reset to a value of 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has been initialized from the main control built-in RAM (step S38) after the setting change process (step S37) from the timing ty2. Anything that resets to the value 0 may be used until the value is set to 0.

As shown in FIG. 97 (C), when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Must not have been. As described above, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated at the time of the timing tx, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation thereof. Information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned ON at the time of the timing ty1 in which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after the timing tx. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at the time of timing ty1, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is mainly used. It is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at the time of timing ty2, it is determined to perform the set value confirmation display process (step S28) based on the storage of those operation information, and from the time of timing ty2, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. I'm supposed to do it. Further, when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is started at the timing ty2 and then the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. Step S28) is to be completed (timing t4).

When confirming the set value, the setting key switch 1311a needs to be turned on at the time of timing ty1, but at the time of timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored in the timing ty1, the second operation information stored in the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives, but at the time of the timing ty1, the second operation is performed. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change between the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is operated during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. There is.

Further, in this example, at the time of timing ty1, the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at the time of timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, the value 1 is set. The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 from the timing ty2 until the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets to

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. As a condition, a value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and in FIGS. 97 (B) and 97 (C), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is assumed that the situation is continuing. In this respect, the main body frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing ty1 arrives, and the main body frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. In the closed situation, even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is restricted from setting the value 1 (to set the value 0) as the second operation information. There is. This can be illegally changed or illegally set under the condition that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 during the business hours of the game hall (under the situation where the manager of the game hall is difficult to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. It does not matter, and the main body frame 4 has never been opened to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the outer frame 2 is used between the timing t3 and the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. According to this, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the RAM is cleared. It is possible to set the value 1 to the notification flag RCL-FLG and prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming infeasible. Then, even if some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to at least prevent the game start itself from being hindered.

In the present embodiment, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, and the first operation information is mainly controlled. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU, and the first operation information stored in the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Further, at the time of timing ty1 in which the main control MPU completes the wait time wait process after the timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is set as the main control MPU. The second operation information stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Then, at the time of timing ty2, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), perform the setting change process (step S37), or perform the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) based on the storage of those operation information. It is determined whether to perform step S28), and the determined process is performed. That is, during the period from when the first operation information is stored at the timing tx until the timing ty1 where the second operation information is stored arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and turned off. It is possible to freely change between the state and the state. Then, at the time of timing ty1, the second operation information is sent to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. It is stored, and at the time of the subsequent timing ty2, whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) or perform the setting change process (step S37) based on the storage of those operation information, or to confirm the set value. It is determined whether to perform the display process (step S28), and the determined process is performed. As a result, when changing the setting of the set value or displaying the confirmation of the set value, the hall administrator mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. Even if you forget to operate the pachinko machine 1, you can change the setting key switch 1311a to the ON operation state until the timing ty1 where the second operation information is stored arrives. There is no need to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 again, and the processing intended by the hall administrator after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing). Any one of (step S28)) can be executed promptly. Further, in the case of initializing the main control built-in RAM, even if the hall administrator mistakenly turns on the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3. By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off during the period until the timing ty1 in which the second operation information is stored arrives, it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the hall administrator immediately executes the process intended by the hall administrator (one of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the setting change process (step S37), and the set value confirmation display process (step S28)). be able to.

As described above, for the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 until the timing ty1 where the second operation information is stored arrives, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the power is turned on. It is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored arrives. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is not necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a at the same time, and it is possible to turn on the setting key switch 1311a after operating the RAM clear switch 1310f. , It is possible to facilitate the operation of the hall manager for a plurality of operation units.

When the main control built-in RAM is initialized or the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, but the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. The timing is the time point of the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is not the time point of the timing ty1 in which the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. This is because the RAM clear switch 1310f is composed of a push-type switch whose operating state is not maintained, and is a RAM clear switch after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 until the timing ty1 arrives. Even if an attempt is made to continue operating the 1310f, it may be unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived, and the hall manager may stop the operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f. Therefore, by setting the timing for operating the RAM clear switch 1310f at the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is not necessary to continue operating the RAM clear switch 1310f for a long period of time, and the hall management It is possible to reliably execute the initialization (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) of the main control built-in RAM as intended by the person.

Also, as mentioned above. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. The initialization process of the above is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. At the time of completing the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510, a command for specifying that the command is waiting for determination of whether or not there is an ON operation of the setting key at the timing ty1 is issued to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ), After the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. The setting key that notifies that the state can be changed to the ON-operated state is being executed. As the notification that the setting key can be operated, the voice that repeats "the setting key can be operated", the message "the setting key can be operated!" Is displayed, and the setting value setting key switch 1311a of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process is turned on. It is decided to execute the lamp emission in the color corresponding to whether or not it is in the operated state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 3003 and the fraudulent monitoring using the vibration sensor 2005 are restricted. .. That is, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty2, the hall administrator changes the RAM clear switch 1310f from the operated state to the non-operated state, or turns the setting key switch 1311a from the ON operation to the OFF state. It is possible to change from the state of being operated or the state of being turned off to the state of being turned on, but monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 3003 and using the vibration sensor 2005 can be used. It is restricted not to execute fraud monitoring. As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or vibrates when operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or the setting key switch 1311a, it is detected as a fraudulent act. It can be prevented and the obstruction of regular work can be suppressed.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machines in the change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while the setting of the set value is being changed, and FIGS. 99 and 100 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value. In the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from the state where the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are not performed. It has become a thing. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the confirmation display of the set value is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while the setting of the set value is being changed, but the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the pressing operation unit of the pachinko machine 1 is not operated, it is different in that various information at the time when the power is turned off is retained even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 98, when changing the setting of the set value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state, and then the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) and the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the outer frame is closed. Work to open the main body frame 4 with respect to 2 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By operating and turning on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it is possible to change the setting of the set value (change). It becomes the permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the set value (set value 1 to 6) each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it from the rotation position of the ON setting key cylinder to the original position and operating the OFF operation (timing t4). That is, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value is set. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, the player can play the game by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). It becomes a state.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main control MPU starts the processing when the main control power is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Until, the setting change process of step S37 is not completed (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and after that, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. It is forbidden to prevent the interrupt permission setting in step S52 from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol in step S114, and the special electric accessory control. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, the normal electric accessory control process, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 The input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and gates 2003, and the special symbol variation display, normal symbol variation display, and second start opening. It is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the large winning opening door 2413, the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

As shown in FIG. 99, when confirming and displaying the currently set value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state, and then the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If this is the case, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) and the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the outer frame is closed. Work to open the main body frame 4 with respect to 2 (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By operating and turning on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f (timing t3), it is possible to confirm and display the set value (timing t3). Confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, the current setting value (the value set among the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder with the setting key turned on to the original position, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF (timing t4). ), Switch from the state where the set value is displayed to the state where the set value is not displayed for the setting display 1310 g. That is, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value is set. It becomes impossible to display the confirmation (unconfirmable state). Then, the player can play the game by pulling out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). It becomes a state.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the main control MPU starts the processing when the main control power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, but the setting is made at the timing t4. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display process in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display process), and from timing t3. During the period up to the timing t4, it is prohibited not to set the interrupt permission in step S52 after that, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt process is not started until the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the special symbol in step S114, and the special electric accessory control. The process, the normal symbol in step S116, the normal electric accessory control process, and the like are not executed and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the set value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state), but the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 The input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and gates 2003, and the special symbol variation display, normal symbol variation display, and second start opening. It is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the large winning opening door 2413, the distribution operation of the distribution piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

[13-1. About special symbols, various ball entry detection, and payout devices]
As shown in FIG. 98, since the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is not started in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. The state (variation) in which it is impossible to display the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400. It becomes an impossible state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52. , It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

When the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is displayed when the game ball B wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Even though the input is valid, it becomes impossible to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is impossible, but the non-variable state. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the first start port 2002 or the first (2) The difference is that the input of the detection signal is valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the starting port 2004.

Further, when the change display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, or when the change display of the special symbol is stored as a hold. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control power-on processing is terminated, and then in step S38, a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is specified. Since it is cleared except for, the information about the variable display of the special symbol will be lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the changeable state is established, but the change display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off is not restarted. In addition, when the power is turned off, the special symbol stored as a hold is not displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the variable state, a fraud-related error (for example, a severe error during magnetic detection or vibration detection) that makes it impossible to perform a game such as a variable display of a special symbol due to some fraudulent activity has occurred. In this case, the peripheral control MPU may perform display processing of fraud-related error information notifying a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600), or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of light emitting devices). Fraud to notify the LED121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) Fraud related error mode of light emission processing, or to notify a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) to that effect. Illegal related error output processing is performed. However, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is impossible to display the variation of the special symbol ( Although it is in an immutable state A), the above-mentioned fraud-related error output processing is not performed. This is because it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and changes the setting of the set value in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, do not perform all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the output processing of fraud-related error sounds that can reduce the work efficiency of the operator at a loud volume is not performed, while the other processing is performed as usual.

Further, since the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is not started in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the second entrance 2008, and the gate portion 2003, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each is mainly controlled. The MPU does not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery and the symbol change (change of the special symbol). (Display) and the payout of the game ball B will no longer be performed, so that the game ball B will be used as the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. Even if the ball enters 2004, the progress of the game due to it can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , The high probability state is no longer given, and as a result, the game ball B has a big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the first entrance during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. (Ii) Even if the ball enters the entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

It should be noted that the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the various winning openings and the gate portion (gate) in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid the situation where the measurement (added to the out number counter) is performed.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002. When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate portion 2003, from the detection sensors corresponding to each. The detection signal of the game ball B is input by the main control MPU so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery and the symbol change (variation display of the special symbol). , It is possible to pay out the game ball B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B is paid out and high. It is possible to give a probabilistic state (when the game ball B is set to the "valid state" as the state when the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 as described above).

In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the change permission state, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first entrance 2007 , When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 is used. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid when the main body frame 4 is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game. Because there is.

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU is set to start the payout control power-on time process, and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580. That is, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. However, as described above, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gates (gates) in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the large winning opening 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B is not paid out. ..

If the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 while operating, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f is input from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633, and the payout control built-in RAM Since all areas are cleared, information regarding the payout of the game ball B will be lost. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580, but the game ball B that has not been paid out is paid out when the power is cut off. It is designed so that it will not be restarted.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the timer interrupt process on the main control side (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is the same as in the change permission state. Is not started, so the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes an impossible state (unchangeable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52. , It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

When the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the detection signal is displayed when the game ball B wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Even though the input is valid, it becomes impossible to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state B). As described above, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is impossible, but the non-variable state. In A, the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the first start port 2002 or the first (2) The difference is that the input of the detection signal is valid when the game ball B wins a prize in the starting port 2004.

Further, when the change display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, or when the change display of the special symbol is stored as a hold. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 (when the setting of the set value is changed) while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. While the information related to the display is lost, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f (when the setting value is confirmed and displayed), the timing is set. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at t4, the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 of the main control power-on processing is terminated, but the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is as in the setting change processing in step S37. Since the process of step S38 for clearing the area is not executed except for the specific area, the information regarding the variable display of the special symbol is retained. Therefore, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the variable display of the special symbol, which is interrupted when the power is turned off, is restarted when the variable state is reached. Also, when the power is turned off, the special symbol stored as a hold is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, as described above, in the variable state, some fraudulent activity is performed and it becomes impossible to perform a game such as a variable display of a special symbol (for example, a severe fraud-related error at the time of magnetic detection or vibration detection). When an error occurs), the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud-related error information to notify a predetermined display (for example, effect display device 1600) to that effect, or a predetermined light emitting device. (For example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) may be subjected to light emission processing in an improper-related error mode for notifying that fact, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, a lower speaker 153a, etc.) may be subjected to light emission processing. Although the fraud-related error output processing is performed to output the fraud-related error sound that notifies the fact, the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is the same as in the change permission state. Although it is in a state where it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (non-variable state A), the above-mentioned fraud-related error output processing is not performed. This is because it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 to confirm and display the set value in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, do not perform all of the above-mentioned fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing. However, in view of suppressing the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is possible to exemplify that the output processing of fraud-related error sounds that can reduce the work efficiency of the operator at a loud volume is not performed, while the other processing is performed as usual. In addition, in order to prevent fraud-related error output processing, processing that is prohibited according to the difference in events that hinder the work of hall clerk between the control performed in the above-mentioned change permission state. The types and numbers of these may be different. For example, in the change permission state, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state, fraud-related error output is performed when some fraud-related error occurs. While not performing only a part of the processing, or in the change permission state, all the fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs, while the confirmation display state. Then, it can be exemplified that a part of the fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is not started as in the change permission state, so that the first start port Detection sensors corresponding to each when the game ball B enters various winning openings such as 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the second entrance 2008, and the gate portion 2003. The main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the game ball B, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection sensor itself may not detect the game ball B, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be input but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery and the symbol change (change of the special symbol). (Display) and the payout of the game ball B are no longer performed, so that the game ball B can be used for the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball enters 2004, the progress of the game due to it can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , The high probability state is no longer given, and as a result, the game ball B has a big winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the first entrance during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. (Ii) Even if the ball enters the entrance 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

In the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the various winning openings and the gate portion (gate). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input by the main control MPU, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid the situation where the measurement (added to the out number counter) is performed.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52, and the first start port 2002. When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, and the gate portion 2003, from the detection sensors corresponding to each. The detection signal of the game ball B is input by the main control MPU so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery and the symbol change (variation display of the special symbol). , It is possible to pay out the game ball B. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B is paid out and high. It is possible to give a probabilistic state (when the game ball B is set to the "valid state" as the state when the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 as described above).

In this example, from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, from the end of the confirmation display state, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 , When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the second entrance 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as effective, but at the timing t5, the outer frame 2 is used. On the other hand, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid when the main body frame 4 is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game. Because there is.

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU is set to start the payout control power-on time process, and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580. That is, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 in the same manner as in the change permission state. However, as described above, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gates (gates) in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the large winning opening 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out. ..

If the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 (when the setting of the set value is changed), the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at that time. Since the signal (detection signal) is input and the entire area of the RAM with built-in payout control is cleared, the information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost, whereas the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 (when the setting value is confirmed and displayed), the process of clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is not executed at that time. Information about B's payout will be retained. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is cut off is triggered by the fact that the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. It is designed to resume the payout of.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the current set value (the set value 1 to the set value at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The value set out of 6) is displayed, but in the confirmation display state in which the game ball B, which has not been paid out when the power is turned off, is being paid out as described above, the payout such as out of balls is displayed. When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies a display other than the setting display 1310 g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633) to that effect. Performs payout-related error output processing that performs error information display processing, or performs light-emitting processing of a payout-related error mode that notifies a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a or a plurality of LEDs 213a) to that effect. I am doing it. As a result, in the confirmation display state, whether the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out at the time when the power is cut off is completed, or a payout-related error such as a ball out occurs and the game ball B is paid out. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an error, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss. Since payout-related error handling is an important event for smooth game play later, we decided to emphasize payout maintenance regardless of the work efficiency of hall clerk, and like the above-mentioned fraud-related error handling. No special prohibition is set, and the same processing as in normal times is performed without any suppression.

As described above, when the game ball B enters the various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit (when confirming the set value is displayed), the game ball that has not been paid out when the power is turned off at that time. The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol) in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. , The second special symbol) is in a state where it is impossible to display the fluctuation (non-variable state A), so when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f when the display is performed or when the variable display of the special symbol is stored as a hold. If it is (when confirming the set value), the fluctuation display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was turned off is resumed at that time, or it is stored as a hold when the power is turned off. There is no variable display of special symbols. That is, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was turned off is restarted, or it is stored as a hold when the power is turned off. It is a period in which it is possible to pay out only the game ball B, which is unpaid when the power is cut off, while preventing the game progress due to the change display of the special symbol. .. For example, when the hall is closed, the game ball B enters various winning openings and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, but when the power is cut off, the power is turned off. A loss will occur to the player by the amount of the game ball B that has not been paid out, but after that, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and putting it in the confirmation display state, the game progress after the power is cut off is prevented. However, it is possible to pay out only the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is cut off, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned off, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, and while blocking the progress of the game after the power is turned off, the game ball B that has not been paid out when the power is turned off While the period is set so that only payout can be performed, the confirmation display of the set value may not be performed. Further, an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the power switch 630a is provided, and when the hall clerk turns on the operation of the other operation units, until the operation is turned off. , It is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, and while blocking the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns on the operation, only the payout of the game ball B that has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation It may be a period during which the above can be performed. Even in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the game ball B that has not been paid out when the hall clerk turns on the operation is paid out while blocking the progress of the game during the period when the hall clerk turns on the operation. Only can be done, and it is possible to prevent the player from incurring a loss.

[13-2. About jackpot games and launchers]
As shown in FIG. 98, since the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is not started in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. It operates a large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and a distribution piece 2415 that distributes the game ball B accepted in the large winning opening 2005 to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. It becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52. , The large winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. , The game ball B can be inserted into the large winning opening 2005, or the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second entrance 2008.

At the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, if the big winning door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating during the execution of the big hit game, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. , The setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the jackpot game is being executed ( Information about the winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) will be lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the large winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated, but the power is interrupted when the power is cut off. The big hit game that has been played is not restarted, and the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are not operated.

As described above, since the timer interrupt processing on the main control side (switch input processing in step S104) has not been started in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the first start port 2002 and the second When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the start opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the second entrance 2008, and the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of them. Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B Neither payout nor granting a high probability state will be performed, and as a result, the game ball B will be able to win the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the set value. Even if the ball enters the second entrance 2008, the progress of the game due to the ball can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the large winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, the end time of the change permission state. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4, the large winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. It may be possible to do so. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game. Because there is.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the firing permission signal setting process in step S113) has not been started, but the handle 182 fires in the change permission state. In consideration of checking the operation, etc., the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B during that period is set. The game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side (the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is set. Even after the end of the game ball B, the game ball B can be continuously fired when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is also possible to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be prepared. You can start the game immediately after closing.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the timer interrupt process on the main control side (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is the same as in the change permission state. The game ball B accepted in the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2005 is distributed to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. The distribution piece 2415 becomes inoperable. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52. , The large winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, when the big hit game is started at the timing t6 after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated as the big hit game. , The game ball B can be inserted into the large winning opening 2005, or the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second entrance 2008.

If the big winning opening door 2413 or the distribution piece 2415 is operating during the execution of the big hit game at the time when the power is cut off at the timing t0, the timing is performed while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at t3 (when the setting of the set value is changed), the setting of step S37 of the main control power-on processing is performed when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4. Since the change process is terminated and then cleared in step S38 except for a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, the jackpot game is being executed (operation of the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f (when the setting value is confirmed and displayed), the information regarding (middle) is lost. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 of the main control power-on processing is terminated, but all of the main control built-in RAM is as in the setting change processing in step S37. Since the process of step S38 for clearing the area except for the specific area is not executed, the information regarding the execution of the big hit game (during the operation of the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415) is retained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is completed, the large winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. As an opportunity, the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was cut off is restarted, and the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before restarting the big hit game that was interrupted when the power was cut off at the timing t5. Immediately after resuming the game, the game ball B can be efficiently entered into the large winning opening 2007 or the second entrance 2008.

As described above, since the main control side timer interrupt process (switch input process in step S104) has not been started in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the first start port 2002 and the second When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the start opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, the second entrance 2008, and the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of them. Is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the large winning opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, and the second reception 2008, the game ball B Neither payout nor granting of a high probability state will be performed, and as a result, the game ball B will be able to win the big prize opening 2005, the first entrance 2007, for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball enters the second entrance 2008, the progress of the game due to the ball can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the large winning opening door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, the end time of the confirmation display state. The big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at the timing t4. It may be possible to do so. This is because it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to launch the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is practically difficult to start the game. Because there is. Further, if the jackpot game suspended at the time when the power is cut off from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, the end of the confirmation display state, the jackpot game is restarted before the jackpot game is restarted. It is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for the launch of the game ball B, but by delaying the restart of the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off, before restarting the jackpot game. It becomes easy to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182, and the game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 2007 or the second entrance 2008 immediately after restarting the big hit game. ..

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt process (the emission permission signal setting process in step S113) is not started as in the change permission state, but the confirmation display is displayed. In consideration of checking the firing operation by the handle 182 in the state, the firing permission signal indicating that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 during that period. The logic is set so that the game ball B can be launched when the handle 182 is operated. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side (the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is set. Even after the end of the game ball B, the game ball B can be continuously fired when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to prepare for launching the game ball B by operating the handle 182 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing t5, and it is possible to prepare the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can start the game immediately after closing.

[13-3. About production equipment and production materials]
As shown in FIG. 98, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is predetermined. It is possible to display an image. Then, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker is used. , Notifying that the setting of the set value is being changed The notification during setting change is being executed. As this setting changing notification, a voice that repeats "setting is being changed", a message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and a lamp is emitted in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 in the selection operation process. It is supposed to be. Further, the notification during setting change is a notification (effect) performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification performed in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. .. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the setting changing notification are executed in parallel, the setting changing notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is completed. The morphology can also be exemplified. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker cause a symbol change and a big hit game. The game start notification is executed to notify that it is possible to start the game such as.

In the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also notifies as the above-mentioned setting changing notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display displaying indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the display being changed in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008 are awarded. Even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each when the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates are used even though it is not a period during which the game should be played in the change permission state due to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. A warning effect A for notifying the part that the game ball B has entered is being executed. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting changing notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, in the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is not in the state of turning on the setting key, but the setting key is turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed to notify that the setting key is illegally turned on by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the symbol is being changed during normal operation, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the design is not changed during normal operation, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects B and C are performing the effects in the same manner, the effects may be executed in different modes so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol is in a state of being changed.

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the processing when the peripheral control power is turned on, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 are used. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a screen. That is, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600 in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. There is. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is further rotated. It is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light with. However, during the period when the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibited period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is mounted. (For example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) are initially operated. That is, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main body is in a state in which it is impossible to display the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (unchangeable state A). The initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position to the operation position. It is decided to confirm whether or not, and to perform accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. Then, after the end of the change permission state at the timing t4, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a fluctuation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol is transmitted. The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the fluctuation permission state or the confirmation display state is performed. Since the execution timing of the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is not delayed and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started by executing the interrupt enable setting as in step S52, the function display unit is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the 1400 special symbol display. However, in such a case, since the state shifts to the variable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the initial operation of the effect member, if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, the effect member is operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. This may not be possible and the opportunity for the production member to operate may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state A). ), Since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when the variable state is entered after the change permission state ends. There is a high possibility that it is. As a result, even when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted after the change permission state is terminated, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. The effect member can be operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect content is not missed.

However, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Therefore, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect member is completed, the initial operation of the effect member is started. Waiting for the completion of the operation, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. That is, the timing for turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, and in either case, the setting key switch at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 99, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and a predetermined image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to display. Then, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the symbol display (decorative symbol display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600 and the image of the effect display device 1600 are displayed, as in the change permission state. By the output from the lamp and the speaker, the confirmation display notification is executed to notify that the confirmation display of the set value is in progress. As this confirmation display notification, a voice that repeats "confirmation display is in progress", a message display "confirmation display in progress!", And a lamp emission in a color corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 are executed. It is supposed to be. Further, the confirmation display notification is a notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification performed when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. .. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening notification (display of "frame is open", voice, etc.) is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is executed with the highest priority without performing. In addition, the main body frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is prioritized over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification is completed. The morphology can also be exemplified. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at the timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker cause a symbol change and a big hit game. The game start notification is executed to notify that it is possible to start the game such as.

Further, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, the big hit that is interrupted when the power is turned off, triggered by the state in which the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 can be operated. It is possible to restart the game and operate the big winning door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415, but as shown in FIG. 100, when such a big hit game is restarted, the image and the lamp of the effect display device 1600, The output from the speaker restarts the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power is cut off, and executes the jackpot game restart notification that notifies that the jackpot door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 are operated. Before resuming the big hit game, the big hit game is waiting to be executed when the power is cut off due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, that is, the big winning door 2413 and the shaking. The jackpot game standby notification may be executed to notify that the fragment 2415 is waiting for operation. As a result, it is possible to prepare for the launch of the game ball B by operating the handle 182 even before the big hit game is restarted, and the game is efficiently sent to the big winning opening 2007 and the second entrance 2008 immediately after the big hit game is restarted. Ball B can be inserted.

In the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, as in the change permission state, as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification, in addition to the image of the effect display device 1600, the output from the lamp, and the speaker, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal hold display, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display, and a second special. In addition to the symbol display, the second special hold number display, and the round display, the setting changing display consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting of the set value is being changed (change permission state), the setting value A confirmation display displaying indicator including one LED indicating that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LED of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to grasp that the game does not proceed by the notification by the function display unit 1400.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008 are awarded. Even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each when the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, various winning openings and gates are used even though it is not a period during which the game should be played in the confirmation display state due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A warning effect A for notifying the part that the game ball B has entered is being executed. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the main body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, in the normal time when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is not in the state of turning on the setting key, but the setting key is turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed to notify that the setting key is illegally turned on by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the symbol is being changed during normal operation, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the design is not changed during normal operation, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. C is running. Further, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effect being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol is changed, and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects B and C are performing the effects in the same manner, the effects may be executed in different modes so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol is in a state of being changed.

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 are started. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a screen of. That is, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 are the same as in the change permission state. It is possible to adjust. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is further rotated. It is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light with. However, during the period when the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the effect operation unit 160 to be operated for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibited period in which the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the processing at the time of turning on the peripheral control power, and the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. (For example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) are initially operated. That is, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to display the change of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (unchangeable) as in the change permission state. In the state A), the initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, each of the effect members is sequentially or simultaneously operated in a predetermined operation pattern. By operating the effect member, it is confirmed whether the effect member operates normally from the initial position to the operation position, and accurate alignment is performed so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. Then, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a fluctuation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol is transmitted. The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

If the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the setting value setting change or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, the fluctuation permission state or the confirmation display state is performed. Since the execution timing of the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is not delayed and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started by executing the interrupt enable setting as in step S52, the function display unit is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the 1400 special symbol display. However, in such a case, since the state shifts to the variable state without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the initial operation of the effect member, if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, the effect member is operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern. This may not be possible and the opportunity for the production member to operate may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, it is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (non-variable state A). ), Since the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed, the initial operation of the effect member is completed when the variable state is entered after the confirmation display state ends. There is a high possibility that it is. As a result, even when the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation after the confirmation display state is finished, the initial operation of the effect member is not affected. The effect member can be operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect content is not missed.

However, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Therefore, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the initial operation of the effect member is completed, the initial operation of the effect member is started. Waiting for the completion of the operation, it becomes possible to execute the effect using the effect member. That is, the timing for turning off the setting key switch 1311a at the timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial operation of the effect member, and in either case, the setting key switch at the timing t4. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to change the symbol.

Further, when the effect member is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, at least the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the game board 5 is executed in advance, and the effect member is mounted on the main body frame 4. The initial operation of the effect member may be delayed until "after the main body frame 4 is closed at the timing t5". This is because the main body frame 4 is opened during the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value, and the main body is closed by the closing operation of the main body frame 4 after the setting change of the setting value or the confirmation display of the setting value is completed. An impact will be generated on the frame 4. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 may not operate normally, or the position may be displaced at the initial position. By starting the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 after the main body frame 4 is closed, it becomes possible to deal with such a situation.

In addition, when each of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is sequentially or simultaneously initially operated, the initial operation of each of the effect members is not normally completed (each effect member). If there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time by the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of, or if there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time, the initial stage is performed again. If there is an effect member that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after performing the operation or retry operation), an effect using the effect member that was not completed normally is executed during the symbol change. It is decided to limit it so that it will not be done. Here, as described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value of the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. Immediately after the power of the machine 1 is turned on, the special symbol display on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is possible to display the variation of the special symbol (variable state), and the initial operation of the effect member is performed. .. In this example, if the initial operation of the effect member is not completed normally under such a situation, the player feels a sense of discomfort that the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position during the variable display of the special symbol. Since there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 will be given to the user, the setting value will be changed and the setting value will be confirmed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If not, one of the effect members is detected at the initial position at a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (the time when the initial operation of each effect member is expected to be completed and is assumed to be located at the initial position). When not, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

On the other hand, if the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation during the setting change of the set value (change permission state) or the confirmation display of the set value (confirmation display state), the regular setting change or confirmation display is performed. In order to avoid obstruction of the work, even if the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, it is suppressed so that the initial position error notification is not performed. Then, after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. The initial position error notification is set to start after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, but it is a specification to start in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation. You may. Further, at the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation, the notification of the mode that does not interfere with the regular setting change or confirmation display work among the images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 ( For example, the specification may be such that only the lamp) is executed in advance.

As an example of the above modification, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, it is special. The effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 while making it impossible to display the variation of the symbol and preventing the game from progressing. While the initial operation is performed, the setting of the set value may not be changed or the confirmation of the set value may not be displayed. Further, an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the power switch 630a is provided, and when the hall clerk turns on the operation of the other operation units, until the operation is turned off. , It is impossible to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the initial operation of the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed while preventing the game progress after the hall clerk turns on the operation. It may be a period of time. Even in such a case, even if the hall clerk turns off the operation and then the fluctuation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set is transmitted during the symbol variation, the initial operation of the effect member is affected. The effect member can be operated from the initial position to the operation position based on the fluctuation pattern, and the information obtained from the effect content can be not missed.

[13-4. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent acts are monitored in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided in the game board 5 by changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned by the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 ) Is provided with a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 and monitors the fraudulent activity by the magnet. , The monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 to become the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor that detects fraudulent activities such as entering a ball into various winning openings and gates (gates) provided, the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activities based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. The fraudulent activity due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, there are normal times (setting value setting change and setting value confirmation display are not performed) and setting value setting change and setting value confirmation display. So, the mode of monitoring is different.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, whether it is around a place where magnetism is generated (a setting change board 1311 located behind the game board 5 or a setting key switch 1311a, or a game board 5). One magnetic sensor capable of identifying (whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side) is provided. Then, in normal times, the magnetic sensor 3003 causes magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not originally occur in the area provided with the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether the magnet is approaching), monitors fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or display confirmation by someone other than the person who changes the setting of the set value or displays confirmation, and also monitors the front of the game area 5a. It monitors whether magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated originally (magnetism approaches) is generated in the area, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to the game board. It monitors fraudulent activities such as entering balls into various winning openings and gates provided in 5. As a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, a metal fraudulent device is used in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). , A magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent instrument is installed, and the magnet and metal fraud through the slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment and the opening that destroyed a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the device is operated to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 is input, it is determined that the fraudulent activity using the magnet is performed. Then, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. Is output so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent activity is being carried out.

Further, although not shown, the magnetic sensor 3003 of this example is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and has a first magnetic detection having high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It has become possible to perform magnetic detection within a region and magnetic detection within a second magnetic detection region having a directionality that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the opposite side surface. ing. Note that "strong sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The magnetic sensor 3003 is arranged so that the first magnetic detection region and the second magnetic detection region emanating from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1, and one of the magnetic detection regions. Including the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection region is the winning openings such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and others. It is possible to monitor multiple points among the main parts of the ball flow path, the other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to monitor the area where is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a. ..

Further, in this example, as a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, vibration capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 is possible. A sensor 3004 is provided. Then, during the normal time, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity only during the jackpot game, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor the fraudulent activity other than the jackpot game. This is because in the big hit game, the game ball B that is received in the big winning opening 2005 by the distribution piece 2415 and circulates inside is distributed to either the first entrance 2007 or the second entrance 2008. When vibration is applied to the distribution piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the large winning opening 2005 and allow the game ball B to enter the second entrance 2008. , To prevent such fraudulent activity. That is, during the big hit game during normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 adds vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not occur to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005. It monitors whether or not it has been done, and monitors fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and letting the game ball B enter the second entrance 2008.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, it is said that the fraudulent activity due to vibration is performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005. Deciding. Then, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is performed around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005, it is installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer, so that the hall clerk can know that the fraudulent activity is being performed.

Further, the security signal output when it is determined that fraudulent activity due to vibration is performed is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is performed. .. However, there are cases where it is determined that fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed and a security signal is output, and cases where it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being performed and a security signal is output. The notification mode when external notification is performed in the fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU is different. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is performed and a security signal is output, the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 is used in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act due to vibration. When it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed and a security signal is output while the notification is performed by the output, the effect is displayed in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act by the magnet. By notifying by the image of the device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, it is possible to distinguish which fraudulent act is being performed.

Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state while the setting value is being changed, and FIG. 102 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state during the confirmation display of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the magnetic sensor 3003 is used to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a magnet other than the regular worker who changes the setting of the set value is a magnet. This is because there is no room for cheating using. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular setting change work.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state, a legitimate worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and a person other than the legitimate worker who changes the setting is illegal due to vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, even if the legitimate worker who changes the setting vibrates, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the legitimate setting change work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting value is set by turning on the setting key 1311a and operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a state where the change can be made (change permission state), but when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, the pachinko machine 1 is passed through the external terminal board 558. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. In addition to this, even when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, when the change permission state is terminated, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 On the other hand, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. That is, when the setting of the set value is changed, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. This security signal is used when it is determined that a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 is input and the fraudulent activity due to vibration is performed while the magnetic sensor 3003 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity by the magnet. When the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input while the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity due to vibration, and it is determined that the fraudulent activity due to vibration is being performed, the hall computer is subjected to the detection signal. It is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 3003 and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. By outputting a security signal to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 is warned of monitoring through the hall computer even though the monitoring of such fraudulent activity is not executed, and the set value is properly set. It is possible to let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the setting of is being changed. That is, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer that the setting of the set value has not been changed by the person who commits the fraudulent act through the hall computer. Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control MPU outputs the second security signal, and the setting change of the set value is completed by this second security signal. Can be grasped by the hall clerk through the hall computer.

The security signal may be output to the hall computer for a time that can be recognized by the hall computer, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3'is short (for example, 1 second or less). It may be present or it may be for a long time (for example, 10 seconds or more). However, when the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, is subsequently output. There is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is not terminated at the timing t4 when the setting key is turned off, that is, when the change permission state is terminated. That is, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4 before the timing t3'when the output of the first security signal ends arrives. In this way, if the output of the first security signal is not completed at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, at the time when the change permission state is terminated, the first security After the signal output is completed, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). That is, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, even if the output of the first security signal is not completed at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, at the time when the change permission state is terminated, the whole computer is notified. The security signal can be reliably output twice.

As another example in the case where the above-mentioned predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be used. That is, if the output of the first security signal is not completed at the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, that is, at the time when the change permission state is terminated, a new security signal is newly output from that point. (The timer for counting the signal output time is set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be continuously output. In this case, the security signal is output for a long period of time exceeding the predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal), and the set value is the same as when the second security signal is output. It is possible to let the hall clerk know that the setting change of is completed through the output of the security signal for a long period of time. If it is not necessary for the hall clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the security signal output mode due to the environment of the game hall, etc., based on the operation of the predetermined changeover switch or the like, The second security signal itself may be canceled without being output.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the magnetic sensor 3003 is used to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity, as in the change permission state. In the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value is an illegal act using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do. In addition, when confirming and displaying the set value, even if the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , It is possible to suppress the obstruction of the regular confirmation display work.

Further, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to prevent the monitoring of fraudulent activity, as in the change permission state. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a legitimate worker who confirms and displays the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for a person other than the legitimate worker who displays the confirmation to perform fraudulent acts due to vibration. Because there is no such thing. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display vibrates when confirming the set value, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, and the legitimate confirmation display work is performed. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting value is set by turning on the setting key 1311a and operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The confirmation display is possible (confirmation display state), but when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state is started, the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the main control MPU. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main is for the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, it is sent to the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU does not output a security signal to the installed hall computer. That is, when the setting of the set value is changed, the security signal is output to the hall computer twice, whereas when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the security signal is output to the hall computer by 1. It will be output only once. As a result, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the fraudulent activity is not monitored by using the magnetic sensor 3003 or the vibration sensor 3005. Yes, even though the monitoring of such fraudulent activity is not executed, by outputting a security signal to the hall computer, the monitoring of the pachinko machine 1 is warned through the hall computer and set properly. It is possible to let the hall clerk know that the value is confirmed and displayed through the hall computer. That is, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer that the confirmation display of the set value is not performed by the person who commits the fraudulent act through the hall computer. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the security signal for the second time as in the change permission state, so that the setting value is changed and the setting value is set. It is possible to distinguish which was performed from the confirmation display of.

In addition, when it is determined that fraudulent activity by magnets or vibration is performed and a security signal is output to the hall computer, peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. While notification is performed by the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 as external notification in the error-related processing controlled by the MPU, when the setting of the set value is changed (change permission state) or the set value is set. When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), do not send any information about the monitoring result to the peripheral control MPU, and error-related controlled by the peripheral control MPU. As an external notification in the processing, no notification is performed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. This also prevents the work of changing regular settings and displaying confirmations from being hindered.

As an example of the above modification, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the setting is made. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the period is set during which fraudulent activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 3003 and vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, while the setting value setting is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed. You may do so. Further, when an operation unit different from the setting key switch 1311a, the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the power switch 630a is provided and the hall clerk turns on the operation of the other operation unit, the magnetic sensor 3003 or the vibration sensor 3005 is provided. It may be a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activity using is not performed. Even in such a case, when the inspection work of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, even if a legitimate worker who performs the inspection work brings the magnet close to the machine or applies vibration, it is detected as a fraudulent act due to the magnet or vibration. This can be prevented and the obstruction of regular inspection work can be suppressed. Further, at least at the start of the period during which the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 3003 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer in the same manner as at the start of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, it is possible to warn the pachinko machine 1 to be monitored through the hall computer and to let the hall clerk know that the inspection work is being performed regularly.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity by the magnet, is it around the place where magnetism is generated (the setting change board 1311 located behind the game board 5 or the setting key switch 1311a)? Although one magnetic sensor capable of specifying (whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of 5) is provided, a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided, for example, on the front side of the game board 5. Each magnetic sensor may be able to detect the generation of magnetism in the front of the game area 5a where it is located, or around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5. In such a configuration, similar to the configuration of one magnetic sensor 3003 described above, in the normal state, fraudulent activity is monitored using a plurality of magnetic sensors, whereas a change permission state and a confirmation display state are performed. In, it is possible not to monitor fraudulent activity using a plurality of magnetic sensors, but in the change permission state or confirmation display state, some of the magnetic sensors (for example, setting change) among the plurality of magnetic sensors are changed. The monitoring of fraudulent activity may be performed using only the magnetic sensor provided around the board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a).

Similarly, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors are provided. For example, in addition to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the large winning opening 2005, the large winning opening located on the front side of the game board 5 is provided. Each vibration sensor may be able to detect the occurrence of vibration in the vicinity of the entry port other than 2005, or in the vicinity of the setting change board 13111 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. In such a configuration, in normal times, monitoring of fraudulent activity is performed using a plurality of vibration sensors (however, for the vibration sensors provided around the distribution piece 2415 inside the grand prize opening 2005, the vibration sensors are used. (Only during the big hit game), it is possible not to monitor fraudulent activity using multiple vibration sensors in the change permission state or confirmation display state, but in the change permission state or confirmation display state, it may not be performed. Of the plurality of vibration sensors, only some of the vibration sensors (for example, the vibration sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a) may be used to monitor fraudulent activity.

In addition, fraudulent activity due to magnets or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission status or confirmation display status is completed (immediately after the monitoring of fraudulent activity is started). There is concern that the fraud monitoring system may be weakened because important security signals based on the detection of actions cannot be output. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity is delayed so as to delay until the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state elapses. It can be exemplified that the output timings of security signals based on the detection of fraudulent activity do not overlap. Specifically, although the monitoring of fraudulent activity is started immediately after the change permission state and confirmation display state are completed, the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state and the first security signal in the confirmation display state are started. If a new security signal is output (detection of fraudulent activity) within the output period of, the security signal output in advance is output without discarding the output of the new security signal. The output information of the new security signal may be stored and retained until the completion of the operation, and the new security signal may be output in a form delayed from the original output time. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the start time of fraud monitoring itself should be extended until the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the output period of the first security signal in the confirmation display state ends. May be. Even with such an embodiment, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded, and the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened can be suppressed.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses information about the control of the game effect and information about the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands at a predetermined timing, and stores a predetermined storage area (commands) of the main control built-in RAM. By setting it in the exclusive area (command buffer) to be used and sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can also send information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. Can be grasped. However, when the setting value is changed or the installation value is confirmed and displayed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information on the control of the game effect and the information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 are used as various commands in the main control built-in RAM. While the change permission status and confirmation display status are being executed, only some commands are immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the remaining commands are in the change permission status and confirmation display status. After the end, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

First, the command transmission timing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (A) is a time chart showing a command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the setting value is not changed or the setting value is not confirmed and displayed), and FIG. 103 (B) is shown in FIG. Is a time chart showing the command transmission timing when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed and the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, at least the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process is started at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the game ball B is placed in various winning openings and gates 2003. It is described that the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each when the ball enters.

As shown in FIG. 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 62. Then, during the period from the timing t3 to the timing ty, as described in the above-mentioned [Behavior of the pachinko machine at the time of turning on the power], the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the main control side is executed, and the timing When ty arrives, it is determined which combination the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value change permission condition is set. If it is satisfied, the process proceeds to the setting change process in step S37, and the setting permission state is set. Further, in the determination in step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. After initializing, make it variable. Further, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, a predetermined setting value display permission is permitted. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process in step S28, and the confirmation display state is set. Further, in the determination in step S27, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, the main control built-in RAM in step S38. Make it variable without initializing. As described above, the variable state is a function display by starting the main control side timer interrupt process (special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114) by executing the interrupt enable setting in step S52. It is a state in which it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the unit 1400.

As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts a system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty, which is the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Since the initialization process for booting is completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after the timing ty.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the time of timing t3, and the setting value is not changed or the setting value is confirmed and displayed, assuming that the power is normally turned on. In this case, if the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is also operated at the time of timing t3, the variable state is set after the main control built-in RAM of step S38 is initialized from the time of timing ty. On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated at the time of timing t3, the variable state is set from the time of timing ty without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM, and these commands. Is set and immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

For example, when the main body frame 4 is open at the time of timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door opening command specifying that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer, and the door is opened. As soon as the hour command is set, it is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and during the period until the timing t5, which is the time when the main body frame 4 is closed, arrives, the effect display device. The door opening notification for notifying that the main body frame 4 is open is executed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the 1600. As the notification when the door is opened, the voice that repeats "the door is being opened", the message "the door is being opened!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted with a higher brightness than usual. In this way, while the main body frame 4 is open, the hall manager can immediately grasp that the main body frame 4 is open by executing the door opening notification to the outside, and the main body frame 4 can be opened. During the opening of 4, the monitoring system can be strengthened so that only the hall manager can cheat.

As shown in FIG. 103 (B), the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the time of timing t3, and when the setting of the set value is changed or the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the RAM is also operated at the time of timing t3. When the pressing operation unit of the clear switch 1310f is operated, the setting of the set value can be changed from the time of timing ty, while the change permission state is set, while the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed at the time of timing t3. If the unit is not operated, the confirmation display state is set so that the confirmation display of the set value can be performed from the time of the timing ty. Then, in the change permission state, the change permission state is terminated at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the change is changed after the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38 from the timing t4. Make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state ends at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and changes from the timing t4 without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. Make it possible.

In the above-mentioned change permission state and confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. , The storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first storage area (first command buffer) and the second storage area (second command buffer) are stored as the storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510, while when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is sent. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without immediately transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510, and at the time of the timing t4, the second command buffer is held. The command set in is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, at least in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the command that needs to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state or the change permission state is set in the second command buffer at the timing t4. A command that needs to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 is set after the confirmation display state is finished.

Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets the information related to the control of the game effect and the state related to the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer and sets them in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command is set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer, but all the commands are set except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state. The command is set only in the first command buffer so that it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. However, except for the change permission status and confirmation display status, the first command buffer and the second command buffer should not be separated, and if a command is set in the command buffer that is not divided, the command is immediately issued. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

First, as the command set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a command related to fraud monitoring, a command at the time of opening the door that specifies that the main body frame 4 is open, and various winning openings. When the game ball B enters the (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large winning opening 2005, etc.) or the gate portion 2003, the detection itself (abnormal entry) is performed even though the input of the detection signal is invalid. ) Is mentioned, such as a command at the time of abnormal entry to specify that there was. Specifically, the door open command is set in the second command buffer when the main body frame 4 is open at the timing ty at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the second command is set. When the door open command is set in the buffer, the door open command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives, and at the time of timing t4. , The door opening command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the command at the time of abnormal entry is set in the second command buffer when the game ball B is detected (abnormal entry) in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. , When the command for abnormal ball entry is set in the second command buffer, the command for abnormal ball entry set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. At the time of timing t4, the command at the time of abnormal ball entry set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a door opening command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, so that the period until the timing t5, which is the time when the main body frame 4 is closed, arrives. Is executing the door opening notification notifying that the main body frame 4 is open by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. As the notification when the door is opened, the voice that repeats "the door is being opened", the message "the door is being opened!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted with a higher brightness than usual. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, so that the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 are displayed from the timing t4 for a predetermined period. By the output from, the notification at the time of abnormal ball entry is executed to notify that there was an abnormal ball entry in various winning openings and the gate portion 2003. As the notification at the time of abnormal ball entry, a voice that repeats "abnormal ball entry", a message display "There is an abnormal ball entry!", And a lamp emission with a higher brightness than usual are executed. In this way, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the main body frame 4 is open and whether or not there is an abnormal entry in various winning openings and gates 2003, and the change permission state and confirmation. After the end of the display state, by executing the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification to the outside, the main body frame 4 is open, and abnormal ball entry occurs in various winning openings and gates 2003. The hall manager can know what happened. It is possible to simultaneously execute the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormally entered after the change permission state or the confirmation display state is completed, but the notification when a serious fraud is suspected (for example, when the ball is abnormally entered). Notification) may be prioritized for execution.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring such as door open command and abnormal winning command are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state and confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without transmission, and at the time of timing t4, the command set in the second command buffer is around. It is designed to be transmitted to the control board 1510. As a result, when changing the setting of the set value or confirming the set value, it is possible to prevent the hall manager from executing the notification when the door is opened or the notification when the ball is abnormally entered due to an unintended fraud detection. Can suppress the inhibition of.

On the other hand, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the command set in the first command buffer includes a setting change command that specifies that it is the start time of the change permission state and a start of the confirmation display state as a command related to the setting. Examples include a setting confirmation command that specifies that it is time, a setting change completion command that specifies that it is the end of the change permission state, and a setting value confirmation display completion command that specifies that it is the end of the confirmation display state. .. Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the setting confirmation command is set at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts. , Set in the first command buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at the timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set at the timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, it is set in the first command buffer, and any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of the timing ty, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. During the period, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. .. As a warning notification corresponding to the setting change command, the voice that repeats "setting is being changed", the message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color while the setting value is being changed. It is supposed to be. In addition, as warning notifications corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting is being confirmed", the message "Setting is being confirmed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color while the setting value is being confirmed (setting value). While changing the setting of, the light emission mode different from that of the lamp light emission in the corresponding color) is to be executed. In this way, in the change permission state and confirmation display state, the hall manager can perform the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value by executing the warning notification to the outside. It can be grasped immediately, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that only the hall manager does not cheat in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As described above, the command related to the setting such as the setting change command and the setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are started, and the set command is set. It is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In the change permission state or confirmation display state, even if the main body frame 4 is open or there is an abnormal entry in various winning openings or gates 2003, notification when the door is opened until after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends. Although it is not a normal fraud monitoring system because it delays the execution of notification when an abnormal ball enters, a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, etc. precede the command set in the second command buffer. By sending a command related to the setting of (a specific command for caution) to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that only the hall manager does not cheat even in the change permission state and the confirmation display state. be able to.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, the peripheral control MPU executes warning notification corresponding to the command type. In the change permission state, it is possible to change the setting of the set value, and compared to the confirmation display state, a monitoring system is especially required to prevent anyone other than the hall administrator from illegally changing the setting of the set value. However, by executing the warning notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door opening command or an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4, the peripheral control MPU executes a door opening notification or an abnormal ball entry notification. However, in these notifications, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "BBB" is added to the voice from the speaker. It outputs ("door is open, BB, door is open, ...", etc.) and is executed with a combination of "message + warning sound". On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed. In the notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is executed only by voice without outputting the warning sound. ing. As a result, even if a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed when changing the setting of the set value or confirming the set value, it is directed to the outside compared to the notification when the door is opened or the notification when an abnormal ball enters. Appeal can be suppressed, and obstruction of regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. About transmission timing of game information commands]
In the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the set value is confirmed and displayed, the set value confirmation and display process of step S28 is performed, and then the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (at the time of timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and the game information command corresponding to the various information is built in the main control. By setting it in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also grasps the information about the game before the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, after the confirmation display state ends, the current game state, the variable display of the special symbol interrupted when the power is turned off, the number of holdings stored when the power is turned off, etc. are displayed on the peripheral control board 1510. By grasping the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the effect by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The display can be resumed, and the display of the number of holds stored when the power is turned off can be resumed.

In this regard, regarding the game information command, the second command buffer is not at the end of the confirmation display state (at the time of timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) but at the start of the confirmation display state (at the time of timing ty). When the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is retained until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. Then, at the time of timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as the game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side power-on processing. Further, FIG. 105 (A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated), and is a time chart of FIG. 105 (A). B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the confirmation display of the set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In this example, the case where the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the game backup information is transmitted as a game information command is described. However, the RAM is described when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the clear switch 1310f is operated to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting of the set value, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area in step S38. , The game backup information will be lost, and the game backup information will not be transmitted as a game information command.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the main control power-on processing of this example, in the determination in step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 in the main control MPU. When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, the processes of steps S29 to S36 are performed. Of the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read from the game backup information and a game information command corresponding to the various information is set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. There is. Then, following the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). In the determination in step S27, the main control MPU assumes that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the value is present, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the processing of step S32 is performed before the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, various information is read from the game backup information, and the game information command corresponding to the various information is issued to the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is set in (command buffer). Further, when the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 and the checksum value (sum value) in step S30 are set. The restart of the game will be delayed by the amount of time it takes to determine whether or not the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) matches. By performing the processes of steps S29 to S36 before performing the set value confirmation display process of step S28, the time until the game is restarted after the set value confirmation display process of step S28 is performed is shortened. Will be able to.

As shown in FIG. 105 (A), when the power is turned on normally, that is, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at the time of timing t3, the step is started from the time of timing ty. The main control built-in RAM of S38 is made variable without being initialized. At the timing ty, which is the start of such a variable state, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command. It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (image, lamp, speaker output of the effect display device 1600) at the time when the power is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. be able to.

When the peripheral control MPU receives the game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation). The initial operation of the portion 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, from the time of the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is started. It is done. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position to the operation position. It is decided to confirm whether or not, and to perform accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is in a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the effect member waits at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the effect member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is completed, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during a symbol variation is transmitted as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation during the symbol variation is transmitted. At the timing of, the effect member is operated from the initial position to the operation position.

As shown in FIG. 105 (B), when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing t3, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. If not, the confirmation display state is set so that the confirmation display of the set value can be performed from the time of the timing ty. Then, in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display state is terminated at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the confirmation display state is changed from the timing t4 without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. Make it possible. In such a case, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as the game information command in the second command buffer at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, and the game information command is set in the second command buffer. When is set, the game set in the second command buffer until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives without immediately transmitting the set game information command to the peripheral control board 1510. The information command is held, and at the time of timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (image, lamp, speaker output of the effect display device 1600) at the time when the power is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start of the variable state. can.

As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty at the start of the confirmation display state, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held, and at the time of timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled. It is designed to be transmitted to the board 1510. This prevents the effect (images and lamps of the effect display device 1600, output from the speaker) at the time when the power is turned off when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, and hinders regular work. It can be suppressed. Further, since the game backup information is already set in the second command buffer as the game information command at the time of the timing ty which is the start of the confirmation display state, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. Even if noise occurs and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty at the start of the confirmation display state, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives the setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty, the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation). The initial operation of the portion 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 or the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is performed. Is being done. Each of such effect members is a member capable of operating between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member normally operates from the initial position to the operation position. It is decided to confirm whether or not, and to perform accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. As a result, even if the effect member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty, which is the start of the confirmation display state, the effect member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation. If the effect member does not return to the initial position in one initial operation, the effect member waits at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the effect member to the initial position several times. Can be prevented. Then, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during a symbol variation is transmitted as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a predetermined variation during the symbol variation is transmitted. At the timing of, the effect member is operated from the initial position to the operation position.

As described above, after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends, the fluctuation pattern command can be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, while the period from the timing ty to the timing t4. The fluctuation pattern is not transmitted to the confirmation display state. Therefore, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the effect member does not operate due to the transmission of the variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation. It is not possible to determine whether or not the product is not operating due to a failure of the effect member. In this respect, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the initial stage of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is set. By performing the operation, it is possible to notify the outside that "the effect member is normal but not accompanied by the game", and it can be determined that the effect member is not a failure. In this example, the initial operation of the effect member is performed in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but the operation is performed to notify that the effect member is not a failure. For example, in the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, only the temporary operation of the effect member is performed separately from the initial operation, and after the confirmation display state at the timing t4 ends. , The initial operation of the effect member may be performed. The temporary operation of the effect member may be an operation different from the initial operation, or may be the same operation as the initial operation.

When changing the setting of the set value, a setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty at the start of the change permission state, and the set setting change command is immediately applied to the peripheral control board 1510. Is sending to. Then, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 in the same manner as when the setting confirmation command is received when the setting change command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing ty. The initial operation of the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210) is performed. In this way, even in the change permission state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the effect member (for example, the effect operation unit 160 or a plurality of effect members) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is the same as in the confirmation display state. By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to notify the outside that "the effect member is normal but the situation is not accompanied by the game", and it is not a failure of the effect member. It can be determined.

[14-2. About extension of warning notification after the end of change permission status and confirmation display status]
In the above-described embodiment, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is sent by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Although it is executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a time chart showing a case where the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends.

As shown in FIG. 106, although the details have been described above, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at the start of the change permission state at the timing ty, and the first command is set at the start of the confirmation display state at the timing ty. A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command and a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of the timing ty, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. During the period, the warning notification corresponding to the type of command is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

At the end of the change permission state at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and at the start of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. However, any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, so that the peripheral control MPU receives a predetermined time (for example, for example) from the time of timing t4. During the period until the timing t4'after 30 seconds) has passed, the warning notification being executed from the time of the timing ty is continuously executed by the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. There is. That is, the warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed in the change permission state and the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but the timing is also executed after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated. The warning notification is extended and executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), which is the period from t4 to the timing t4'. This extension of the warning notification is terminated when the extension ending condition of the warning notification is set and the set extension ending condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the warning notification ends in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) as an extension period, the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer unit, and the timer unit clocks the predetermined time. It starts and ends when the time expires. As another example, when the warning is terminated with a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, a loop of five message voices) as an extension period of the warning notification, the predetermined number of times is set in a specific counting unit and the count is set. The unit may start counting a predetermined number of times and end when the number of times expires.

As described above, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the timing t4'that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the time of the timing t4 arrives. Until then, the warning alert has been extended. For example, when the warning notification is executed only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, it takes a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the time of the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the time for executing the warning notification during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 is shortened. If a confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not notice it. In particular, when confirming and displaying the set value, it is not necessary to change the setting, so it is possible for anyone other than the hall administrator to illegally confirm and display the set value in a short time. May not be noticed by a person. On the other hand, when the warning notification is extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, a short time (for example, 1) from the timing ty at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. Even if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in (2 seconds), the period from the timing t4 to the timing t4'is secured as the time for executing the warning notification. For this reason, even if a person other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or confirms the setting value in a short time, the hall manager can easily notice it, and a person other than the hall manager can perform fraudulent acts. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no such thing.

Further, as described in detail above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the warning corresponding to the command type is obtained by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification is being executed. As a warning notification corresponding to the setting change command, the voice that repeats "setting is being changed", the message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color while the setting value is being changed. It is supposed to be. In addition, as a warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting is being confirmed", the message "Setting is being confirmed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color while the setting value is being confirmed. It is supposed to be. Then, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the message content of the warning notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state may be maintained, but the change permission may be maintained. The message content may be different from the status or confirmation display status. For example, in the warning notification after the change permission status or confirmation display status is completed, the message content is different from the message content in the change permission status or confirmation display status, such as "setting change completed" or "setting confirmation completed". It may be configured to output a message such as "I did it" in a loop. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the hall manager to notice not only the above-mentioned countermeasures against fraudulent activities but also when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is normally terminated. In addition, when maintaining the message content of the warning notification in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, make sure that the temporary notification is not divided at t4, which is the switching timing with the extension of the warning notification. May be good. For example, at least the voice output from the speaker among the warning notifications executed according to the command type in the change permission state or confirmation display state is continuously output until the voice is completed so as not to end halfway. As for the voice in the extended warning notification, it can be exemplified that the voice is executed again from the beginning of the voice after the voice of the continuously output warning notification is completed.

Further, regarding the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is notified when the door is opened or when an abnormal ball enters. The warning sound such as "Bee-Bee" that is output as "Bee-Bee" is not output, and it is executed only by voice. Further, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, it is impossible to display the change of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the special symbol display on the function display unit 1400 becomes a variable state capable of displaying the variation of the special symbol. For example, by transmitting a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various production sounds are output from the speaker. In this regard, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or confirmation display state is completed, the warning sound is not output from the speaker as the warning notification, so that the warning sound is finitely provided to be output. A situation in which there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels when allocating to the finitely provided channels in order to give a margin to the provided channels and output various production sounds. Can be avoided as much as possible.

Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the peripheral control MPU receives a command at the time of opening the door or an abnormal entry from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the timing t4. Although the hour command is received, the door is opened from the time of timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification, without executing the door opening notification or the abnormal ball entry notification at the timing t4. Time notification and abnormal ball entry notification are executed. That is, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the extended warning notification is executed in preference to the door opening notification and the abnormal entry notification. As a result, even if a person other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or confirms the setting value in a short time, the hall manager can give priority to the extended warning notification. It is easy to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that only the hall manager can cheat. Regarding the notification suspected of being severely fraudulent (for example, the notification at the time of abnormal ball entry), the extended warning notification is being executed, not at the timing t4', which is the end time of the extended warning notification. However, it may be executed at the time of timing t4.

As for the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormally entered, not only the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but also the warning sound such as "BB" is emitted from the speaker. Is output, and it is executed by the combination of "message + warning sound". The door open notification and the abnormal entry notification are continuously output during the execution of the door opening notification and the abnormal entry notification, but are output only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). May be. However, in this example, since the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are executed from the time of the timing t4', which is the end time of the extended warning notification, for example, the extension time (timing) of the warning notification is executed. If the period from t4 to the timing t4'is longer than or the same as the output time of the door opening notification or abnormal ball entry notification (for example, 10 seconds), the door opening notification or abnormality The notification at the time of entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem caused by the decrease in the frequency of notification, the extension time of the warning notification (the period from timing t4 to timing t4') is longer than or the same as the output time of the warning sound (for example, 10 seconds). May be configured to output the door open notification and the abnormal entry notification only for the remaining time after the extension time of the warning notification among the output times of the door opening notification and the abnormal entry notification. .. Further, it may be configured to newly start the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball enters abnormally after the extension time of the warning notification.

Further, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the door opening notification is executed from the timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification. When the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed arrives before the timing t4', the notification when the door is opened is not executed. That is, if the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification, the notification when the door is opened is not executed. However, if the main body frame 4 is closed during the execution of the extended warning notification and the main body frame 4 is opened again before the timing t4', the extended warning notification is terminated and the door opening notification is sent. Running. Normally, after changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, the main body frame 4 is only closed and the main body frame 4 is not opened again, but the setting value is set. If a mysterious situation occurs in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the setting or confirming the set value, the door opening notification consisting of the combination of "message + warning sound" becomes a warning notification. By giving priority to execution, it is easy for the hall manager to notice that the main body frame 4 is open due to a mysterious situation suspected of being fraudulent, and the situation where the main body frame 4 is open continues. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no such thing.

Further, as described in detail above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state during the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, the magnetic sensor 3003 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not used to monitor the fraudulent activity. On the other hand, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are completed, the magnetic sensor 3003 and the vibration sensor 3005 are used to monitor the fraudulent activity (however, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor the fraudulent activity. , Only during big hit games). When it is determined that a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, the fraudulent notification is executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker as an external notification. At this time, even when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, the unauthorized notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, for fraudulent notifications that are suspected of being serious fraud such as magnets and vibrations, by prioritizing extended warning notifications, it is easier for hall managers to notice, and non-hall managers can commit fraudulent activities. The monitoring system can be strengthened so that there is no such thing.

Further, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. For example, the predetermined message content is notified by the output from the lamp and the speaker, and the effect display is performed. The image of the device 1600 may not be output. In the configuration in which the warning notification is performed by using a part of the plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) in this way, the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as a warning notification during extension, but when it is determined that fraudulent activity by magnets or vibration is being performed, it is output as a warning notification during extension. The fraudulent notification may be executed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 (by notification using only the unused notification member among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the change permission status or confirmation display status is completed, the hall manager can be made aware of the fraudulent notification suspected of being fraudulent without stopping the extended warning notification. can. Similarly, for the notification when the door is opened and the notification when an abnormal prize is won, only the image of the effect display device 1600 which is not output as the warning notification during extension (only the unused notification member among the plurality of notification members is used). (Depending on the notification used), the notification when the door is opened or the notification when an abnormal prize is won may be executed.

Further, in this example, the warning notification is extended and executed regardless of whether the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, but the warning notification is extended and executed only after the confirmation display state ends. It may be configured to be used. For example, when changing the setting of the set value, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the change permission state ends (cleared in step S38 except for a specific area of the main control built-in RAM). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time of timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the time of timing t4. During the period until the timing t4'appears, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are configured to execute the RAM clear notification not to extend the warning effect but to notify that the RAM has been cleared. May be. As a result, the hall manager can know that the RAM has been cleared after the change permission state ends.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame lower unit 120 Swelling part 123 Device arrangement part 130 Upper plate (storage plate)
131 Storage area 131a Front area 131b Side area 132 Bottom wall 133 Rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front wall 135 Supply port 136 Outlet 137 Alignment part 138 Storage and light emission decoration part (light emission decoration part)
138a LED
150 Door frame production device (production device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)
1512 Effect display control unit (effect control means)
1600 production display device (effect display means)
3000 Back unit 3200 Back second production unit (front decoration)
3210 Rotating decoration (front decoration)
3228 Back second outer decoration (front decoration)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner circumference decorative body (front decorative body)
3300 Back third production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3312 First decorative body 3313 Second decorative body 3320 Back third upper drive motor (drive motor)
3330 Lower unit 3331 Lower vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3332 First decorative body 3333 Second decorative body 3340 Back third lower drive motor (drive motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 1st decorative body 3353 2nd decorative body 3360 Back 3rd left drive motor (drive motor)
3370 Right unit 3371 Right side ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 1st decorative body 3373 2nd decorative body 3380 Back 3rd right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (3)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a symbol is drawn based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of the above and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
When the second notification is executed although it is determined by the abnormality determination means that there is an abnormality, the third notification is not immediately performed, and the third notification is performed after the completion of the second notification.
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a symbol is drawn based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of the above and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
If it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality during the second notification, the third notification is performed instead of the second notification.
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A game board having a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined starting port, and a symbol is drawn based on the result of the lottery. In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of the above and executes a predetermined winning game when a hit result is derived as a result of the variation display of the symbol.
When a predetermined start operation is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a setting-related mode is generated to generate a setting-related mode that enables determination of a setting value related to the execution probability of the winning game or confirmation of the setting value. Means and
Setting-related mode termination means for terminating the setting-related mode when a predetermined termination operation is performed during the setting-related mode, and
Abnormality determination means that can determine the presence or absence of a predetermined abnormality,
A notification control means that can be controlled to perform a predetermined notification during the setting-related mode, during a predetermined period after the setting-related mode ends, and when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality.
Equipped with
The notification control means is
The first notification execution means for executing the first notification during the setting-related mode, and
A second notification execution means for executing the second notification during the predetermined period after the setting-related mode is completed, and a second notification execution means.
A third notification executing means that executes a third notification when it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality, and
Have,
At least the third notification is to perform notification using a plurality of notification members provided in the gaming machine.
If it is determined by the abnormality determining means that there is an abnormality during the second notification, the third notification is performed using the notification member not used in the second notification among the plurality of notification members. can be,
Further, the setting-related mode generates either a setting determination mode that enables determination of the setting value or a setting confirmation mode that enables confirmation of the setting value, depending on the mode of the start operation. And
The second notification is performed in a manner different from that of the first notification.
The second notification performed after the setting determination mode ends is different from the second notification performed after the setting confirmation mode ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images